JP2019216889A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing interest in a performance related to a predetermined game.SOLUTION: A game machine (a Pachinko game machine 1 or the like) can be controlled to be in an advantageous state (a big winning game state or the like) that is advantageous to a player. The big winning game state or the like includes a 15R big winning and a 5R big winning. At the start of a round as a predetermined game in the 15R big winning out of the 15R big winning and the 5R big winning, a special performance including a performance of highlighting the 15R big winning is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

  As such a gaming machine, there has been one that displays a round related to a plurality of round games as a predetermined game during a jackpot game state as an advantageous state (Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2006-101442

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, a round display relating to a round game as a predetermined game is merely performed, and there is room for improvement in effects related to the predetermined game.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in producing an effect related to a predetermined game.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The advantageous state is a state configured by repeating a plurality of predetermined games (such as opening the special variable winning ball device 7),
The advantageous state includes at least a first advantageous state (such as a 15R big hit) and a second advantageous state (such as a 5R big hit) which is more disadvantageous than the first advantageous state,
In the first advantageous state, a special effect that is not executed at the start of the predetermined game in the second advantageous state (a special effect including an effect that highlights the 15R big hit in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and (D)). Etc.) can be executed (the characteristic portion 229F, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, since the special effect is executed at the start of the predetermined game, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect related to the predetermined game.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1),
The predetermined game is a variable prize which can be changed to a first state (open state or the like) in which a game medium (game ball or the like) can win, or a second state (closed state or the like) in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to win. For the means (special variable winning ball device 7 and the like), a predetermined number of game rounds (rounds or the like) for controlling the state from the second state to the first state when controlled to the advantageous state is performed (for example, 15 or 5 times). ) The game to be executed (FIGS. 9-1 (A) to (F), (G) to (L), etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the effects related to the game round.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
The advantageous state is a game state (big hit game state or the like) controlled when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit display result or the like).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest in the game state controlled when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3),
The period from the end of the predetermined game in the first advantageous state to the start of the next predetermined game (interval period between rounds of 3 seconds, etc.) is from the end of the predetermined game in the second advantageous state. It is longer than the period until the start of the next predetermined game (such as an interval period between rounds of 2 seconds) (FIG. 9-1 and the like).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being too high due to the first advantageous state becoming too advantageous in a short period of time.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4),
Operable movable objects (movable roles 229F002, 229F003, etc. in FIG. 9-2);
The movable object is operated during a period from the end of the predetermined game in the first advantageous state to the start of the next predetermined game (the movable role 229F002 in FIGS. 9-1 (D) and (F)). 229F003).

  According to such a configuration, the operation of the movable object can be noticed during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game.

(6) In the gaming machine of (5),
The gaming machine is capable of performing a game such that the degree of advantage (big hit probability or the like) for the player differs according to a set value (set value 1 to set value 3 or the like) including a plurality of stages,
It is possible to suggest which set value is set by the operation pattern of the movable object (selection of setting suggestion effect type by movable movable object with set value 1 to set value 3 as shown in FIG. 9B). Etc.)

  According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the operation pattern of the movable object.

(7) In the gaming machine of (5) above,
Holding storage means (RAM 102 or the like) capable of storing information relating to variable display as holding storage information;
Determining means (S110 or the like in FIG. 5) for determining whether or not to be in the advantageous state based on the hold storage information;
Determining means (S101 or the like in FIG. 5) for determining whether or not to enter the advantageous state before the determination by the determining means;
In the advantageous state, when the hold storage information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means based on the determination result of the determination means, the state is controlled to the advantageous state. Can be suggested by the operation pattern of the movable object (such as [holding suggestion effect by the operation pattern of the movable accessory]).

  According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the operation pattern of the movable object.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7),
The gaming machine is capable of performing a game such that the degree of advantage for the player differs according to a set value including a plurality of stages (set value 1 to set value 3 and the like),
Depending on the type of the predetermined image (character image) displayed together with the special effect, it is possible to suggest which set value is set ([setting suggestion effect using character image]).
).

  According to such a configuration, the type of the predetermined image can be noticed.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. FIG. 9 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like according to another characteristic portion. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine according to another characteristic portion. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the effect control command concerning other characteristic parts. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value used as the random number for games which concerns on another characteristic part. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a variation pattern according to another characteristic portion. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table concerning other characteristic parts. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit type determination table concerning other characteristic parts. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table concerning other characteristic parts. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing the game control data holding area concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing arrangement and display contents of a display monitor concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing the storage area which memorizes the number of prize balls concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing a memory map concerning other characteristic parts. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a built-in RAM area according to another characteristic portion. It is a figure showing the example of control of the display in the display monitor concerning other characteristic parts. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of execution of buffer update according to another characteristic unit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main processing concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing the display mode of the display monitor concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing the display mode of the display monitor concerning other characteristic parts. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a display monitor in a modification example according to another characteristic portion. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a display monitor in a modification example according to another characteristic portion. It is a rear perspective view showing a pachinko gaming machine in a modification according to another characteristic portion. It is a rear perspective view which shows the state which opened the frame for gaming machines in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure showing a security cover in a modification concerning other characteristics. It is a figure showing a security cover in a modification concerning other characteristics. It is a figure showing the example of state control concerning other characteristic parts. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing concerning other characteristic parts. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command processing at the time of power supply concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing the priority of effect control concerning other characteristic parts. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control main processing in the modification concerning other characteristics. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation process in progress in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure showing an example of composition of an output amount changeover switch concerning feature part 71AK. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating initial setting control related to a characteristic unit 71AK. It is a figure showing an example of performing information about feature part 71AK. It is a figure showing the example of a display concerning feature part 71AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing concerning feature part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the output switching process at the start which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of an in-progress output change processing concerning feature part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the priority of the effect control in the modification concerning the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure showing an example of execution of an initial operation concerning feature part 72AK. It is a figure showing a control pattern concerning characteristic part 72AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command processing at the time of power supply concerning feature part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of a power supply in the modification concerning the characteristic part 72AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power supply concerning characteristic part 73AK. It is a figure showing the example of a display of the setting confirmation information screen concerning feature part 73AK. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the production control pattern concerning feature part 74AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing concerning feature part 74AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the confirmation effect control processing concerning feature part 74AK. It is a timing chart etc. which show the example of control of the confirmation effect concerning characteristic part 74AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power supply concerning characteristic part 75AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the confirmation effect control processing during a setting change regarding the characteristic part 75AK. It is a timing chart etc. which show the example of control of the confirmation effect concerning characteristic part 75AK. It is a figure showing the production example of the special production concerning feature section 229F. It is a figure which shows the interval period setting suggestion effect determination table concerning the characteristic part 229F in a table form. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of the big hit start which concerns on the characteristic part 229F. It is a flowchart which shows the interval effect setting process concerning the characteristic part 229F. It is a figure which shows the interval period setting suggestion effect determination table concerning the characteristic part 230F in a table form. It is a display screen figure of the image display device 5 which shows the example of an effect of the over winning combination suggestion effect concerning the characteristic part 231F. It is a figure which shows the over winning set suggestion effect determination table concerning the characteristic part 231F in a tabular form. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing regarding the characteristic part 231F. It is a flowchart which shows the over-winning process regarding the characteristic part 231F. It is a display screen figure of the image display device 5 which shows the example of an effect of the acquisition number setting suggestion effect concerning the characteristic part 232F. It is a figure which shows the acquisition number setting suggestion effect determination table concerning the characteristic part 232F in a table form. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition number notification process concerning the characteristic part 232F. It is a display screen figure of the image display device 5 which shows the example of an effect of the prize setting suggestion effect concerning the characteristic part 233F. It is a figure which shows the V winning setting suggestion effect determination table concerning the characteristic part 233F in a table form. It is a flow chart which shows V winning a prize information processing concerning feature part 233F.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting and firing device into the game area.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing are provided. These are each composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of a special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern indicating a number or the like). Is variably displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down). (Scroll display of direction and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol executed synchronously is also simply referred to as a variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays suspended is also referred to as the suspended storage number. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved storage number. In addition, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, there are provided a first hold display 25A and a second hold display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs. Displays the first number of reserved storages, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second number of reserved storages based on the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port that is always kept in a fixed open state by which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is Is in the closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is on (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. It should be noted that the variable winning ball device 6B only needs to change between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four lower right and left sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 that is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when the player enters any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning port is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball becomes large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 20 is provided. As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called an ordinary game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a pass gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the general-purpose game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, there is provided a general symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose display indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are taken in.

  Loudspeakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for a gaming effect is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At a lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so as to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which a prize ball is paid out when the upper plate is full is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation, etc.) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
A game ball is fired toward a game area by a rotation operation by a player on a hit ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol game on the ordinary symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general-purpose game based on the passage). The normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol will be "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (regular symbol lost symbol) other than the symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the determined ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol is “regular symbol lost”. When "per day" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening becomes open).

  When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, a first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  Note that, when the game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or a period in which the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state described later (the start winning prize has occurred. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol is different depending on the big hit type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, it becomes “big hit” and the big hit symbol If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, “2”) different from the above is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is displayed.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit game state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is selected from the timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing of the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening reaching a predetermined number (for example, nine). It is continued until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until reaching a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

  Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special winning opening (the number of rounds and the upper limit period of opening) and a game state after the big hit game state (a normal state, a time saving state, a probable change state, etc. to be described later) are prepared. Type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type where many prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type where few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hitting game state, the opening mode is the same as the big hitting game state in the case of some of the big hit types (the number of opening of the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same). Etc.) to open the big winning opening. As in the case of the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for “small hit”.

  After the big hitting game state is ended, the state may be controlled to a time saving state or a probable change state according to the above big hit type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure fluctuation time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is performed as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average time for fluctuating the figure (the period for fluctuating the figure) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "hitting the figure" in the figure drawing game is improved compared to the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that allow the game balls to easily enter the second start winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly, the second special symbol) is improved, and is a state advantageous to the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a “big hit” is likely to occur.

  The time-saving state and the probable change state continue until one of the end conditions such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. Execution of a predetermined number of special figure games as an end condition is also referred to as count cut (time cut, time cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time-saving state, a probable change state, or the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special map game will be a "big hit", is set in an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed). This is a state in which control is performed in the same manner as when the processing is not performed.

  The state in which the probable change control is being executed is also referred to as a high-probability state, and the state in which the probable change control is not being executed is also referred to as a low-probability state. The state in which the time-saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time-saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the probable change state is a high-precision high-base state, and the normal state is also a low-probability low-base state. The high-accuracy and low-base state is also referred to as a high-accuracy low-base state.

  After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes “small hit” (however, “small hit” occurs. If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to have “small hit”.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that a game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, the state may be controlled to be a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game and raising the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. Note that the effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 is provided. May be performed by turning on / off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5, as the effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the two special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also stopped (derived).

  During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described later. Is continued.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) to be a "big hit" (also referred to as a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation) according to the effect mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of "probable change big hit" which is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state ends, the probable change state becomes In the case of a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot) that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After reaching the reach mode with the non-probable variable symbol, a promotion effect that eventually becomes “probable variable jackpot” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, the display result of the variable display of the decoration symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 is a fixed decoration symbol (for example, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left," "middle," and "right." In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it is “small hit” Alternatively, a common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach combination fixed decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “non-reach loss”). When the display result is “losing”, after the decorative pattern variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the big hit combination (“reach loss”) is displayed as the decorative symbol variable display result. The fixed decoration symbol may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decoration symbol is "reach loss").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-described variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display with execution suspended). As the prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

  During the big hit game state, a big hit middle effect for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the large hit production, a production that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. The big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By performing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting game state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-accuracy state. You may.

  Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), Game state, small hitting game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an input / output port (I / O) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, and data to be referred to when making various determinations to be described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation). An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general-purpose reservation display 25C, and the like (solenoid driving signal).

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass or fail) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, starting port switch (first starting port switch 22A and second starting port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the vehicle has entered and the switch has been turned on, etc.), and is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a special winning opening door. Transmit.

  The main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, directs an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) in accordance with the progress of the game. 12 The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)), and a fluctuation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a special winning opening, occurrence of a prize, the number of storages held, a game state), a command for specifying an error occurrence, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various types of notification such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of restoration of power interruption).

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Determination, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content). In some cases, the control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 includes various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signals, and outputs sounds designated by the sound designation signals from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

  The lamp control board 14 includes various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. I do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the turning on / off of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal and a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for inputting an effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 or the like, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port.

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control board 12, the voice control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, an operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of the main board 11)
First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is performed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the process at the time of power supply stop, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the status of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (Step S4; No), an initialization process (Step S8) is performed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (Step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (Step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (Step S5; No), the initialization process (Step S8) is executed because the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (Step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, the effect control command to specify the backed-up game state before the power interruption, or the effect control to specify the display result of the running special figure game if the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed or that the restoration from the power interruption is being performed. Screen display to perform The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12 after ending the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a register of a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

When receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether a detection signal has been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22).
). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the big hit information (information indicating the number of times of big hits, etc.) and the start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the state has changed to a certain probability) are output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random number used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized. See below).

  Subsequent to the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupts, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the general symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on “per-day drawing”. The execution of the ordinary symbol game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C is turned on to display the ordinary symbol reservation number.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a command control process (Step S27). In some cases, the CPU 103 sets transmission of a production control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as a special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning prize determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning prize, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of stored holds is executed. When a winning start occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a big hit type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of storages to be held, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating a determination result such as occurrence of a start winning prize, the number of storages to be held, and pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the start winning set thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination processing in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processing in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, the first
It is determined whether to start the special figure game or the second special figure game. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", or the big hit type in the case of "big hit" Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (any of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1”, and the special special pattern normal processing ends. Note that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the order of winning the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be established in the order of winning (also referred to as winning order).

  When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is determined by using a random value for determining a variation pattern based on a result of a predetermined determination as to whether the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. And the like are determined. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  The fluctuation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (the special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. (Such as the type of reach effect) and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. The special symbol change processing includes a process of setting a special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. And the like. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special figure change time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol change processing ends.

  The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the change of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The processing for making the setting is included. If the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “losing”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", the game state is updated when the time reduction state or the probable change state is being controlled and the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit game state and setting a big winning opening to an open state based on a display result of "big hit" or the like. Have been. When opening the special winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an open upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and an upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set according to, for example, the type of the big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit opening processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during the opening of the jackpot is based on a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the jackpot, and on the basis of the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. For determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the opening of the big hit ends.

  The post-big hit release processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The post-big hit opening process includes a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the large winning opening is opened has reached a set upper limit number of times, and a process of determining whether or not the number of hits has reached the upper limit number of times. And the like to make settings for ending the process. When the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release processing ends.

  The big hit end processing in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The big hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state, and a change in response to the end of the big hit game state. Processing for performing various settings for starting control and time-saving control is included. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit release pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The small hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of setting the large winning opening to the open state in the small hit gaming state based on the display result being “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit opening processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". The processing during opening of the small hits includes processing for measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and timing for returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When the big winning port is returned to the closed state and the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening processing ends.

The small hit end processing in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a staging operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is performed has elapsed. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operation of effect control board 12)
Next, main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (Step S73; No), the process of Step S73 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

  In addition, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be disabled. However, if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, an interrupt is generated. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In the command reception interrupt processing, a production control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt processing.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command that has been read out is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control process processing or the like can confirm which effect control command has been received and the content specified by the effect control command. It turns on the provided reception flag. When the effect control command specifies a game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis processing in step S75, an effect control process processing is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative illuminant such as a decoration LED, a movable body 32 The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed on the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices in accordance with the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random number used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. After that, the process returns to the step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing a look-ahead notice effect are performed based on a start control effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of held memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display has been received from the main board 11. And so on. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process ends.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol, the reach Whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are to be executed, the mode thereof, the execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, and ends the variable display start setting process. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect processing in step S172 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5 by instructing the display control unit 123. Driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and transmitting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by the output are performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative symbol from the main board 11 is received. In response to, for example, the fixed decoration symbol which is the display result of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to “3”, and the rendering process during variable display ends.

  The waiting process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6”. To ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the small hit effect effect processing. Also, when the reception wait time of the command has elapsed without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special map game is "losing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure ends.

  The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . Further, in the small hit effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit production process ends.

  The small hit end effect processing in step S175 is processing executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and performs various effect controls based on the set contents at the end of the small hit game state. Execute Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process ends.

  The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In this big hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. In addition, in the big hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7 ", and ends the big hit production process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of the basic description)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description is a payout-type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game media is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. An enclosed game machine may be used.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating “-” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operating lever by the player, If the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.) are mounted.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a detachable recording medium, but may be a computer device or the like in advance. It may be in a form of being distributed by being installed in a storage device included in the storage device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, the expression of comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “different”) means that one of the ratios is “0%”. May be included. For example, it may also include that one is a ratio of “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio less than “100%”.

(Explanation of configuration related to other features)
Next, other features of the embodiment of the present invention will be described. This feature enables control of an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player based on the set value, and a configuration or setting for enabling the set value to be changed based on a predetermined setting change operation. A configuration is provided to enable the user to confirm the set value by display. Then, a set value can be displayed by a configuration capable of displaying information on a game value such as a prize ball given based on a game medium such as a game ball entering a predetermined area.

FIG. 8A is a configuration diagram illustrating various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion. The same components as those in the above embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals. For example, the output circuit 111 may have a configuration similar to that of the solenoid circuit 111. The first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B may have the same configuration as the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B. The effect display device 5 has only to have the same configuration as the image display device 5. The case where the display result is “outside” (hiragana) is the same as the case where the display result is “losing” (katakana). The first general winning opening switch 26A, the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 26D are game balls that have passed (entered) any one of the plurality of general winning openings 10. Is detected, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection.

  The effect control board 12 is connected to operation motors AK011 to AK014 for driving a movable member serving as a movable role (movable effect device), and origin sensors AK021 to AK024 for detecting the origin position of the movable member. . The operation motors AK011 to AK014 may be motors or motors using an electromagnetic solenoid. The origin sensors AK021 to AK024 may be configured using a contact-type sensor such as a microswitch or a non-contact-type sensor such as a photosensor or a capacitance sensor. The effect control board 12 is provided with a real-time clock (RTC) 126 capable of outputting time information.

  In this embodiment, when controlled to the small hitting game state, the second special winning opening provided separately from the first special winning opening, which is the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, An open state is established in a predetermined open mode. For example, in the small hitting game state, the second big winning opening is opened during a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) winning balls are generated. State. In the present embodiment, the second big winning opening is set to be opened once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses in the small hitting game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be opened a plurality of times in the small hitting game state. The second special winning opening is opened by the second special winning opening door when the solenoid 83 for the second special winning opening door is turned on, and the game ball passes (enters) the second special winning opening. It will be easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 for the second special winning opening door is in the off state, the second special winning opening door closes the second special winning opening, and the game ball passes through the second special winning opening ( Entry). As described above, the second large winning opening changes between an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter), which is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, in place of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) the second big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball hardly passes (enter) the second big winning opening is provided. You may.

  The count switch 23 serves as a first count switch that detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the first special winning opening. Game balls passing through (entering) the second special winning opening pass through the second count switch installed in the second special winning opening, and are detected by the second count switch. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the second large winning opening that has been opened, the game ball passes (enters) another normal winning opening, such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out than when you do. Therefore, when the second special winning opening is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second special winning opening, and the first state is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the second special winning opening is closed, it is impossible or difficult to obtain (win) a game ball by passing (entering) a game ball into the second special winning opening, which is disadvantageous for the player. There are two states.

  A third count switch and a fourth count switch through which game balls can pass are provided inside the second big winning opening. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second special winning opening passes through either the third count switch or the fourth count switch, and is guided to the back side of the game board 2. The game ball passes through the third count switch and is detected by the third count switch. The game ball is detected by the fourth count switch when passing through the fourth count switch.

In the present embodiment, the game state after the end of the small hit game is controlled to the big hit game state based on the detection of the game ball by the third count switch during the small hit game. Therefore, during the period in which the second big winning opening door is opened during the small hit game, if the course of the game ball is changed by adding vibration or the like and the game ball is detected by the third count switch, Since it is possible for the player to be controlled to be in a big hit game state which is advantageous to the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment stops the game in such a case.

  A regulating member that regulates and allows the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch is provided inside the second winning hole. The restricting member is provided so as to be changeable between a restricting state in which the flowing of the game ball toward the third count switch is restricted and an allowable state in which the flowing of the game ball toward the third count switch is permitted. Have been.

  In the small hitting game state, when a game ball that has won the second big winning port passes through the third count switch, a "big hit" based on the passing of the game ball through the third count switch (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the third count switch. On the other hand, if the game ball that has won the second big winning opening in the small hitting game state passes through the fourth count switch, the "big hit" does not occur. That is, the CPU 103 does not control the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the fourth count switch.

  Then, when the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on the passage of the third count switch, the second big winning opening door is set to a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number ( During the period until the winning balls (for example, 10) are generated, the second winning port is opened. As a result, a round game in which the second large winning opening is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player is executed. In the present embodiment, the second big winning opening is controlled to the first state when the state is controlled to the big hit game state based on the passage of the third count switch. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited thereto, and the first special winning opening may be controlled to the first state.

  The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15” or “5”). Note that even before the number of round game executions reaches the upper limit number, the round game may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball does not win the second big winning opening). Good.

  FIG. 8B is a rear view showing the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the power supply board 17, and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in the board case 201. The main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 29 which can be viewed from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and has a function of displaying various winning information on winning on the display monitor 29. A display changeover switch 300 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 29, and the information displayed on the display monitor 29 can be changed by operating the display changeover switch 300.

  The main board 11 has a door opening sensor 90 for detecting the opening of a glass door frame which covers the front surface of the game board 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a large winning opening for detecting the opening of the first and second large winning openings. Various sensors such as a door sensor 91 are connected, and a function of determining occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) based on detection signals output from these sensors is also provided. A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The main substrate 11 is sealed in a substrate case 201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material. A display monitor 29 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged at the center of the main substrate 11, A display changeover switch 300 is provided. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 300 are arranged at the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 11 refers to the back side of the game board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  The main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100) is provided with each winning opening (a first winning opening, a second winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a general winning opening, hereinafter referred to as “entrance area”). ) Is counted, and various kinds of winning information such as connection ratios and winning ratios based on the counting are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the winning information is displayed. Thereby, various winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning combination after the installation in the game hall can be confirmed. On the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual that the game board surface is designed so that the game ball enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). When the test is performed, it is confirmed (verified) whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, whether or not the adjustment has been performed, what kind of adjustment has been performed, and as a result of the adjustment, the gaming ball enters the general winning opening as designed. Is checked (verified). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize the presence or absence of the adjustment after installation and the contents.

  The power supply board 17 is configured to be able to supply power from an AC power supply (AC 100 V), which is an external power supply (commercial power supply), to electric components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. ing. The power supply board 17 is enclosed in a board case 201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material. A setting changeover switch 52 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate) in the change state is provided. The power supply board 17 is provided with a clear switch AK001 and a power switch AK002.

  The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the person in charge can operate. Further, since the lock switch 51 requires key operation, only the staff having the key for operating the lock switch 51 can be operated among the staff at the game arcade. The lock switch 51 is a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, and also a switch capable of executing an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation).

  When a power-on operation using the power switch AK002 is performed, a predetermined operation using the lock switch 51 or the clear switch AK001, such as an on / off switching operation of the lock switch 51 and a pressing operation of the clear switch AK001, is performed. May be asked. As the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 are turned on using the power switch AK002, a predetermined operation may be performed using these switches simultaneously. Therefore, at least the lock switch 51, the clear switch AK001, and the power switch AK002 only need to be arranged at positions where they can be operated simultaneously by game room attendants or the like. As described above, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 can detect various operations such as on / off switching operations and pressing operations by game room attendants or the like in accordance with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002. Is configured.

  At the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is provided a nozzle (discharge port) for discharging the gaming ball that has won each winning port or the gaming ball that has entered the out port to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is provided with an outlet switch 70 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a shot game ball). The signal from the outlet switch 70 is taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11.

  FIG. 8C is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the content of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration. The first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". This command form is an example, and another command form may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  The command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5 in response to the special symbol variable display in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content of the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or an effect symbol. In the variable display result notification command, when the variable display result is a "losing", a "big hit", or a "small hit", a determination result (predetermined result), or the variable display result is a "big hit" Different EXT data is set in accordance with the result of determining which one of the jackpot types is one of the multiple types (jackpot type determination result).

  The variable display result notification command includes, for example, commands 8C00H to 8C05H. The command 8C00H is a first variable display result designating command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “out”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit A”. The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit B”.

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the stop (decision) of the decoration symbol in each of the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left,""middle," and "right" in the effect display device 5. The command 9000H is a RAM clear notification command for notifying that the storage contents of the RAM 102 have been cleared with the initialization of the game control microcomputer 100 when the power supply is started by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is. The command 9100H is issued when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by turning on the power.
This is a setting change start command for specifying the start of a setting change state in which a setting value can be changed. The command 9200H is a power failure restoration designation command for designating execution of a power failure restoration process corresponding to power failure restoration. The command 93XXH is a setting change end command for designating the end of the setting change state.

  In the setting change end command, for example, EXT data corresponding to a setting value newly set by the change may be set. In this case, different EXT data is set according to the set value newly set by the change in the setting change state or the set value continuously set without being changed. When the setting value has three stages of 1 to 3, the command 9300H specifies that the setting value is set to “1”, and the command 9301H specifies that the setting value is set to “2”. However, the command 9302H may specify that the setting value is set to “3”. Alternatively, as the setting change end command, only the command 9300H whose EXT data is 00H may be prepared, and the end of the setting change state may be designated by the command 9300H regardless of the setting value newly set by the change. Alternatively, as an effect control command different from the setting change end command, a setting value designation command for designating a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be prepared. In addition to the case where the setting value designation command is transmitted in response to the transmission of the setting change end command, for example, in response to the transmission of the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the setting value designation command corresponds to the start of variation in each time of the special figure game. May be transmitted. In addition, a set value designation command may be transmitted along with the execution of a predetermined number of times of the fluctuation display, such as every ten times of the fluctuation start in the special figure game. Alternatively or additionally, the setting value designation command may be transmitted with the transmission of the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command. A setting value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the customer waiting demonstration designation command.

  The command 9400H is a setting confirmation start command for designating the start of a setting confirmation state in which a set value can be confirmed when power supply is started by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command 9401H is a setting confirmation end command for designating the end of the setting confirmation state. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, a command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state (high base state) in which time reduction control is performed. , Time-saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command for specifying the occurrence of an error (abnormal) and the type of the generated error (abnormal) in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormal) designation command, for example, the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormal) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormal) has been determined to have occurred on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification process. The command 9F00H is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating the display of a customer waiting demonstration screen (demo screen display) by displaying an effect image corresponding to the stop of the progress of the game in the customer waiting state.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fan fare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening designation command for designating a period in which the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a command after the opening of the special winning opening that specifies a period in which the special winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set in accordance with the pre-determined result or the big hit type decision result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . Different EXT data is set for the notification command during opening of the special winning opening and the notification command after opening the special winning opening, in accordance with the number of rounds executed (for example, “1” to “15”) in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. This is a first start port winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A is satisfied. The command B200H indicates that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. This is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B is established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number. The first reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning port and the first starting condition has been satisfied. Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning port and the second starting condition is satisfied. Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command are issued when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved storage is reduced). It may be transmitted in response to the start of the execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be used.

The command D100H is a V prize notification designation command for notifying that the third count switch has been turned on when the game ball has passed the third count switch, that is, that a V prize has been won. In the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform a control for executing a V-prize notification effect for notifying that a V-prize has been won based on the reception of the V-prize notification designation command. In the V-prize information presentation effect, a different effect pattern may be determined or the determination ratio of a plurality of effect patterns may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As described above, the set value may be suggested according to the effect mode of the V winning information effect. For example, when the effect image indicating “V” is rotated and displayed, the effect mode of the V prize notification effect includes an effect mode in which the rotation direction is clockwise and an effect mode in which the rotation direction is counterclockwise. It may be. Alternatively, a plurality of effect modes in which the effect image indicating “V” has different display colors may be included. Then, the setting value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the V winning notification designation command. Thus, when the V winning notification effect is performed, the effect mode according to the set value can be appropriately determined.

  FIG. 8D is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value serving as a game random number counted on the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR3 for determining the general figure display result. Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of the MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by the software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is May be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 8-5 shows a fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss is also referred to as a non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern of the reach loss is also referred to as a reach fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern in which the display result is “big hit” is also referred to as a large hit variation pattern, and the variation pattern in which the display result is “small hit” is also referred to as a small hit variation pattern.

  The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach, such as normal reach α, normal reach β,. A variation pattern may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ, in addition to super reach α and super reach β, may be provided.

  In the ROM 101, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1), a display result determination table (set value 2), a display result determination table (set value 3), a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), a big hit type determination A table (for the second special symbol), a small hit type determination table, and the like are stored.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit and the small hit changes according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed. The set value has three stages of 1 to 3, 1 is the highest payout rate, and the payout rate decreases as the value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and the advantage gradually decreases as the value increases in the order of 2, 3.

FIG. 8-6 is an explanatory diagram of the display result determination table. In the display result determination table, a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). For each of the cases where the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, a determination value for determining a large hit and a determination value for determining a small hit are set.

  FIG. 8A illustrates a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1. When the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, if the first special symbol is to be subjected to the variable display, the set value is “ The winning is achieved with a higher probability (1/99) than in the case of “2” and “3”, and a part of these determination values is set as the determination value corresponding to the small hit. The small hit is won with a higher probability (1/50) than when the value is “2” or “3”. When the display variable determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, if the variable special figure specification buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the same as the case where the variable special figure specification buffer is the first. Is determined, and even when the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, the big hit with the same probability (1/99) as when the first special symbol is the variable display target is set. And half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability (100/200) is higher than when the first special symbol is a target of variable display. ) To win a small hit.

  FIG. 8B illustrates a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the jackpot is hit with a lower probability (1/150) than when the setting value is “1”. At the same time as winning, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, so that the small hits have a lower probability (1/99) than when the set value is “1”. You are going to win. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the same as the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first. Is determined, and even when the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, the big hit is obtained with the same probability (1/150) as when the first special symbol is the variable display target. And half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is a target of variable display, and , A small hit is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set value is “1”.

  FIG. 8C illustrates a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the determination value corresponding to the small hit is If it is not set, and therefore the first special symbol is subjected to the variable display, the jackpot has a lower probability (1/200) than the case where the set value is “1” or “2”. Wins, but does not win small hits (win probability: 0). When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the same as the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first. Is determined, and even when the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the big hit with the same probability (1/200) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. And half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is a target of variable display, and , The small value is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set value is “1” or “2”.

The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the special symbol has a big hit (big hit A to big hit). Jackpot C). If MR1 matches any one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is set to the small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The “probability” indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state, but to stop the symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is a big hit symbol It is also to decide whether or not to do. Determining whether or not to make a small hit means to determine whether or not to control the small hitting game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a small hit symbol. As described above, the probability of being controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state is different depending on the set value. Therefore, if the set value is changed, one setting is set in a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for the player. Will be changed to another setting.

  In the present embodiment, in each of the display result determination tables, the winning probability of small hits in the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the second is all the same. The winning probability may be reduced. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first, the winning probability of the small hit is made lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3, but as in the case where the variable special figure designating buffer is the second. Alternatively, the same winning probability may be used for all the set values.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table to determine whether to make a big hit or a small hit. However, the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table are provided separately, and the big hit is determined. The determination is made using a common table in the case of the variation display of the first special symbol and the case of the variation display of the second special symbol, regardless of the variation special designating buffer. The processing may be performed using separate tables for the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first and the case where the buffer is the second.

  In the present embodiment, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used, the determination values other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit are determined as the determination values corresponding to the small hit. It was not set, that is, the small hit was not won, but a part of the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit was set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit was won. It may be. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

  In this embodiment, a total of three setting values 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 May be set to two or four or more (for example, six). In addition, the advantage of the player according to the set value is not limited to the one in which the smaller the set value is, the higher the advantage is for the player, and the larger the set value is, the higher the advantage is for the player. Is also good. For example, when the set value is made up of six stages of 1 to 6, 1 is the lowest payout rate, and the payout rate increases as the value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, and 6 The highest payout rate may be used. As described above, when the set value is set to 1, the advantage is lowest for the player, and when 6 is set, the advantage is highest for the player. The advantage may be gradually increased.

FIG. 8-7 is an explanatory diagram of the big hit type determination table and the small hit type determination table. The big hit type determination table indicates that the big hit type is one of the big hit A to the big hit C based on the hit type determination random number (MR2) when the change display result is determined to be a big hit symbol. Is referred to to determine. The small hit type determination table indicates that the type of the small hit is small hit A or small hit B based on the random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a small hit symbol. Is referred to to determine. In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the third count switch during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type of the big hit D is executed. Has become. When the game ball passes through the third count switch during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type of the big hit E is executed. . The big hit D and the big hit E are not the big hit type determined by the random number value MR2 for judging the hit type extracted at the time of the start winning, but the game ball is played during the small hit game of the small hit A or the small hit B. This is the type of jackpot determined by whether or not it has passed the three-count switch.

  FIG. 8A shows the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol). The big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) uses the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the first special symbol is changed and displayed) to determine the big hit type. Referenced when making a decision.

  FIG. 8B illustrates the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol). The big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) uses the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed). Referenced when making a decision.

  FIG. 8C shows a small hit type determination table. The small hit type determination table is referred to when the small hit type is determined regardless of which of the first winning winning port and the second starting winning port the game ball is in the hold memory based on winning. .

  FIG. 8-8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the jackpot types in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the big hit types are big hits A and big hits D in which the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game state ends, and big hits B, big hits C and big hits E in which the time saving control is executed after the big hit game state ends. Is set. Of these jackpots A to E, jackpot C and jackpot E are the most advantageous jackpots for the player, and jackpot A and jackpot D are the most disadvantageous jackpots for the player. In addition, since the big hit E is a big hit which is more advantageous than the big hit D, the small hit B is set as a small hit which is more advantageous than the small hit A.

  Among the big hits A to E, the big hit A is a big hit that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) for changing the first big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the big hitting game state of the big hit A ends, the time-saving control is not executed. The big hit B is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) for changing the first big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the big hit game state of the big hit B is completed, the time-saving control is executed until the big hit occurs again until the 20 special figure games are executed or the 20 special figure games are executed. The big hit C is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) for changing the first big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the big hit gaming state of the big hit C is completed, the time-saving control is executed until the big hit occurs again until 100 special figure games are executed or 100 special figure games are executed. The big hit D is a big hit that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) for changing the second big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit D, the time-saving control is not executed. The big hit E is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 14 times (so-called 14 rounds) for changing the second big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the big hit game state of the big hit E ends, the time-saving control is executed until the big hit occurs again until 100 special figure games are executed or 100 special figure games are executed.

  The jackpot D and the jackpot E have the second jackpot to be the open jackpot to be opened. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , The first big winning opening. That is, the second big winning opening is opened for the small hit game, and the big hit D and the big hit E based on the occurrence of the V winning during the small hit game are replaced with the first big winning opening as the big hit game. You only have to open the big winning opening.

  In the time-saving state, the probability of being "hit the ordinary figure" is increased, so that a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. For this reason, in the time saving state, a big hit may occur as a result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, or a big hit may occur due to a game ball winning a V during a small hit game. It is easy to occur continuously without going through the state, and it becomes a so-called continuous state.

  In the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B, the number of special figure games for which the time saving control is executed is set to 20, so that a small hit occurs during the 20 special figure games and the game ball The rate of passing through the 3-count switch (the rate at which the gaming ball wins V during the 20 special figure games and a big hit occurs) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit C and the big hit E, the number of special figure games for which the time saving control is executed is set to 100, so that a small hit occurs during the 100 special figure games. The rate at which the game balls pass through the third count switch (the rate at which the game balls win a V during the 100 special figure games and a big hit occurs) is set to almost 100%.

  In this embodiment, five types of jackpots A to E are provided as jackpot types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Six or more jackpot types may be provided. The following types may be provided.

  In the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is “1”, 0 to 49 in the range of the determination value of MR2 from 0 to 299 are assigned to the big hit A, and 50 To 149 are assigned to big hit B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to big hit C. Also, when the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range of MR2 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 249 is assigned to the big hit B, 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range of MR2 0 to 299, 0 to 149 is assigned to the big hit A, and 150 to 249 is assigned to the big hit B, 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the rate of determining the big hit B or the big hit C at which the time-saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game decreases in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. I am trying to become.

  In the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is “1”, 0 to 29 out of the range of the determination value of MR2 0 to 299 are assigned to the big hit A, and 30 Up to 99 are assigned to the big hit B, and up to 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. Also, when the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range of MR2 0 to 299, 0 to 69 is assigned to the big hit A, and 70 to 269 is assigned to the big hit B, 270 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. Also, when the set value is “3”, out of the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 199 are allocated to the big hit A, and 200 to 269 are allocated to the big hit B, 270 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hits B and C at which the time saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game is determined in the special figure game of the first special symbol. Is higher than in the case where the error occurs, and lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3.

In this embodiment, when the set value is 1, the rate of determining the jackpot type to be the big hit C is the highest, then the rate of determining the big hit B is high, and the rate of determining the big hit A is large. The lowest (big hit type determination ratio at set value 1: big hit C> big hit B> big hit A). When the set value is 2, the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot B with the highest rate, then the jackpot A is determined to be high, and the jackpot C is determined to be the lowest (set value). Jackpot type determination ratio in 2: jackpot B> jackpot A> jackpot C). Further, when the set value is 3, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the jackpot A is the highest, then the ratio of the jackpot B is high, and the ratio of the jackpot C is the lowest. (Small jackpot type determination ratio at set value 3: big jackpot A> big jackpot B> big jackpot C).

  It should be noted that, depending on the set value, there may be one or more jackpot types that have not been determined among the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot C. In other words, the fact that the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value that has been set means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%) or that the specific jackpot type is 100%. Deciding on a percentage is included.

  In the small hit type determination table, when the set value is “1”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the small hit A in the range of the determination value of MR2 0 to 299, and 100 to 299 are small. It is assigned to hit B. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 149 are assigned to the small hits A and 150 to 299 are assigned to the small hits B in the range of the determination values of MR2 0 to 299. I have. When the set value is “3”, out of the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 199 are allocated to the small hit B, and 200 to 299 are allocated to the small hit B. I have. As described above, when the V winning big hit occurs during the small hit game, the rate of determining the big hit E in which the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is 100 is 20 times. It is configured to be higher than the ratio for determining the big hit D and to be lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3.

  In the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, the small hit B is determined as a small hit type at a higher ratio than the small hit A, so that the V prize occurs during the small hit game. As a result, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot E is higher than the rate at which the jackpot is determined to be the jackpot D (the jackpot type determination rate by the V prize at the set value 1: the jackpot E> the jackpot D). When the set value is 2, the small hits A and the small hits B are determined at the same ratio as the small hit types, so that a V prize occurs during the small hit game. The rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot D is equal to the rate determined to the jackpot E based on the above (the jackpot type determination rate due to the V prize at the set value 2: the jackpot E = the jackpot D). Further, when the set value is 3, the small hit A is determined as a small hit type at a higher ratio than the small hit B, so that the V prize is generated during the small hit game. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot D is higher than the rate at which the jackpot is determined to be the jackpot E (the jackpot type determination rate by the V prize at the set value 1: the jackpot D> the jackpot E).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit and the determination ratio of the big hit type when the V prize is generated differ according to the set value. In other words, the type of the small hitting game state controlled according to the set value may change, and the type of the big hitting game state controlled when the V winning occurs may change. The game entertainment can be improved.

Depending on the set value, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hits A and the small hits B. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the small hit type differs depending on the set value that is set means that one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit type is determined. The determination of the type at a rate of 100% is also included. Further, the determination ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. When the small hit type is determined at a different rate according to the variation special map, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hit A and the small hit B depending on the variation special map. That is, in order to determine the small hit type at a different ratio according to the variation special map, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit type is determined. 10
Decisions at a rate of 0% are also included. At least one of the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined by using the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be, the more advantageous to the player. The big hit type and the small hit type are not limited to those in which the big hit type and the small hit type are determined according to the set values, and the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined by the same setting ratio for all the set values.

  The gaming property itself is not limited to the one that does not change regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the gaming property may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is set to 1/320, and the probability variation state is set to a gaming property of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the big hit probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the big hit game ends based on the game ball passing through the third count switch during the big hit game. While the later gaming state is controlled to be in a positively changing state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a gaming characteristic (a so-called V-variable type) in which the rate at which a game ball passes through a third count switch during a jackpot game varies according to the fluctuation special map. When the set value set to is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game ball passes through the third count switch during the high base (during the time saving control). Or as a game of controlling the jackpot gaming state (so-called one two-kind mixed type) based on the. Furthermore, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as that of 1-3, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than the case where these set values are any one of 1-3. (For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided. When changing the playability in accordance with the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 or 4, the third count switch is used as an effect switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect every time the game ball passes through the third count switch), When the set value is 2 or 3, the third count switch is used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a positive change state or a big hit game state based on a game ball passing through the third count switch). May be used.

  The ROM 101 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. The variation pattern determination table is used to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns in accordance with the result of the pre-determination. As the variation pattern determination table, a variation pattern determination table for a big hit that is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “big hit”, and a variation pattern determination result of “small hit” is determined in advance. A change pattern determination table for big hits to be used when a change is made, and a change pattern determination table for a change to be used when it is determined in advance that the change display result is to be “miss” are prepared in advance.

  FIG. 8-9 is an explanatory diagram of a large hit variation pattern determination table and a small hit variation pattern determination table. The big hit variation pattern determination table is referred to when a variation display result is determined to be a big hit symbol to determine a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination. The small hit variation pattern determination table is referred to when a variation display result is determined to be a small hit symbol to determine a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination.

FIG. 8A shows a large hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A). The big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A) is referred to when the big hit type is big hit A. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for the jackpot A), when the set value is “1”, the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot is 0 to 300 in the determination value range of 0 to 997 of MR3. ) Are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 801 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. ing. When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 351 to 825 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is allocated, and the fluctuation pattern of 826 to 997 is allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 401 to 850 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is assigned, and 851 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

  FIG. 8B shows a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C). The jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) is referred to when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for the jackpot B and the jackpot C), when the set value is “1”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of the MR3, the variation pattern (0 to 100) of the normal reach jackpot is obtained. PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 351 to 997 are the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). Assigned to. When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 150 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 151 to 450 are assigned. The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is allocated to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “3”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 200 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 201 to 550 are assigned. The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of 551 to 997.

  The variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit A) and the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C) have a normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1) and a super reach α big hit variation pattern (PB1- 2) A predetermined random number in the range of the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as a judgment value to each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the big hit A is won in the special map game, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is higher than the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit, In addition, the setting values become lower in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the superreach α jackpot. The ratio is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. In this embodiment, when the type of the big hit is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and when the big hit type is “big hit A”, the super reach α is determined. The determination value is assigned so as to make it easier to perform, and when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player's expectation that the big hit B or the big hit C will be increased. I can do it.

FIG. 8C illustrates a small hit variation pattern determination table. In the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is any of “1”, “2”, and “3”, the small hit range of 0 to 997 in the range of the determination value of MR3 is 0 to 997. Variation patterns (
PC1-1). In the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random number value within the range of the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Have been. In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as small hit variation patterns. With the setting values “1”, “2”, and “3”, the small hit variation pattern may be determined at a different rate from a plurality of variation patterns.

  FIG. 8-10 is an explanatory diagram of the variation pattern determination table for outliers. The outlier variation pattern determination table is referred to when a variation display symbol is determined to be an outlier symbol, in order to determine a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination.

  FIG. 8-10 (A) shows a variation pattern determination table A for outliers. The outlier variation pattern determination table A is referred to when the number of pending storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the time saving control is not performed in the gaming state. In the deviation variation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super reach A predetermined random number in the range of the random pattern MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as a determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation.

  FIG. 8-10 (B) shows a variation pattern determination table B for outliers. The outlier variation pattern determination table B is referred to when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 in the low base state. In the outlier variation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach outlier variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super-reach α corresponding to the total number of pending storages of 2 to 4 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range that the random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can take to the variation pattern of the loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of the super reach β (PA2-3). I have.

  FIG. 8-10 (C) shows a variation pattern determination table C for outliers. The outlier variation pattern determination table C is referred to when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. In the outlier variation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach outlier variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α corresponding to the total number of pending storages of 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range that the random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can take to the variation pattern of the loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of the super reach β (PA2-3). I have.

  FIG. 8D illustrates the outlier variation pattern determination table D. The loss variation pattern determination table D is referred to when the game state is the high base state in which the time saving control is performed. In the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation deviation pattern (PA2) corresponding to the time saving control. -2), a predetermined random number in the range of the random pattern MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β deviation.

When using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for outliers, the ratio of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super-reach variation pattern, and lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. It is becoming. In addition, when using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for outliers, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 out of the determination values is a superreach α deviation variation pattern, and 901 to 997 of the superreach β deviation is regardless of the variation pattern determination table. If the fluctuation display result is not assigned to each fluctuation pattern, that is, the super-reach fluctuation pattern is determined by the common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so the super-reach fluctuation pattern It is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

  In addition, the “common determination ratio” refers to not only the case where the determination ratio is completely the same at different set values (this embodiment), but also the case where the determination ratio is the same at different set values (for example, the set value 1 to 3 in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach differs by about 1%). If the fluctuation display result is incorrect, it is not limited to the form in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value.If the fluctuation display result is incorrect, Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of all fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super-reach may be the same, or only the determination ratio of any fluctuation pattern of non-reach, normal reach They may be the same. If the fluctuation display result is out-of-range, regardless of the set value, the setting value of both the super-reach α out-of-shift fluctuation pattern determination ratio and the super-reach β out-of-shift fluctuation pattern determination ratio is set to the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to the same form, and if the fluctuation display result is incorrect, only one of the super-reach α deviation fluctuation pattern determination ratio and the super reach β deviation fluctuation pattern determination ratio is determined. May be the same regardless of the set value. If the fluctuation display result is out-of-range, regardless of the set value, the setting value of both the super-reach α out-of-shift fluctuation pattern determination ratio and the super-reach β out-of-shift fluctuation pattern determination ratio is set to the set value. Regardless of the setting, the setting is not limited to the same form, and even when the fluctuation display result is a big hit, the setting ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach big hit is set regardless of the set value. May be the same regardless of When the fluctuation display result is out of order, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach or the normal reach is not limited to the form different depending on the set value set, and depending on the set value, the non-reach or the normal reach may not be changed. There may be one or more undetermined fluctuation patterns among the reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. The fact that the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value that has been set means that one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or that the specific variation pattern is 100% It is also included that the decision is made. The present invention is not limited to the mode in which the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern for out-of-office that differs according to the total number of retained storages. The number of retained storages in the special symbol to be varied (for example, the variation display of the first special symbol) Of the first special symbol, and the number of retained memories of the second special symbol when executing the variable display of the second special symbol). May be determined.

In each of the deviation pattern determination tables, the super-reach deviation patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are set regardless of the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 being any of the numerical values 1 to 3. The range of the assigned random numbers is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the miss probability differ according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the fluctuating display is actually executed in the fluctuating pattern of the super-reach misalignment (super-reach misalignment). The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that the variation display is not limited to the form in which the rate of execution in the variation pattern of the out-of-reach variation depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different. In consideration of the loss probability, the fluctuation display may be executed in the super-reach fluctuation pattern at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 8-11 shows the game control data holding area 150. The game control data holding area 150 is provided in the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 and serves as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. The game control data holding area 150 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control timer setting unit. 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A stores the holding data related to the variable display of the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the winning order (the detection order of game balls) with the first start winning opening with the reservation number, and determines the first start condition by passing (entering) the game ball. Based on the establishment, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 or the like a random number value MR1 for determining a fluctuation display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern, and the like as reserved data. Are stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The first starting condition is satisfied when a game ball passes (enters) a first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning is generated. The hold data stored in the first special-figure storage unit 151A indicates that the execution of the special-figure game using the first special-figure game has not been started yet and has been suspended. This is suspension information that enables determination of whether or not a big hit will occur based on the (special figure display result).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B stores the holding data related to the variable display of the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B. As an example, the second special map holding storage unit 151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the hold number in the second start winning opening and associates the hold number with the second start condition based on the passage (entry) of the game ball. Based on the establishment, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 or the like a random number value MR1 for determining a fluctuation display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern, and the like as reserved data. Are stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The second starting condition is satisfied when a game ball passes (enters) a second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting winning is generated. The hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure has not yet been started and is held, and the fluctuation display result in this special figure game This is suspension information that enables determination of whether or not a big hit will occur based on the (special figure display result).

  In addition, the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, the opening information indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the holding information, and stored in association with the holding number. .

  The general-purpose holding storage unit 151C stores the general-purpose holding information of the general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure holding storage unit 151C determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball in association with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate 41. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting section 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags. The game control timer setting section 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating a timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers. The game control counter setting section 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for counting a part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software. The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, a random number value that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value. The numerical data indicating each random number value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random number value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or an arithmetic process on all or a part of the numerical data.

  The display of the total of the game balls and the ratio of the accessory on the main board 11 of this embodiment will be described. The main board 11 has information on winning of a game, for example, the number of prize balls by winning in the first starting winning opening (navel), the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the first large game. The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls by prize winning at the prize port and the second grand prize port (attacker) are input and the number of shot balls are totaled, and the display monitor 29 displays the first grand prize port and the total number of prize balls. The ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls occupied by the prize to the second winning port (attacker), and the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls by the prize to the second start prize port (denchu) in the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls occupied by the prize in the first and second grand prize openings (attackers), and the base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. Is displayed. The repetition ratio is a percentage of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls (the number of continuous character-acquired balls described below) due to the prize winning in the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is defined as the number of prize balls in the total number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls in winning in the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening (attacker) ( The following figure shows the ratio of the number of acquired ball). The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (the total number of balls obtained as described below) is based on the number of prize balls by winning in the first and second grand prize openings (attackers) and the prize in the second start prize opening (electric chew). The number of prize balls and prize balls by prize holes (first start prize port, general prize port) other than the first grand prize port, the second grand prize port (attacker) and the second start prize port (denchu). It is the sum of numbers and In addition, the first special winning opening, the second special winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable characters, and when the passable width of the game ball is changed, the game ball is won. It is a character whose assumed ratio fluctuates. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the first winning winning opening, the second winning winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (denchu) are fixed auditors, The passable width of the ball is fixed, and the expected winning percentage of the game ball is a fixed character.

  As for the method of totaling and calculating the information related to the winning of the game, regarding the connection ratio and the winning ratio, the winning ball by winning the first starting winning opening (navel) and the general winning opening (sode) in the number of winning balls of 6000 pieces. Number (general prize ball count), number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning port (power chute), ordinary electric prize prize ball number (power chute prize ball number), first grand prize port and second grand prize The number of special prize prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls by winning the mouth (attacker), is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and the connection ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60000 pieces are calculated. The number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric prize prize balls (the number of prize balls), and the special telephone The number of role prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. ing. In other words, the storage of 11 sets of 6000 pieces is stored in a considerable amount (for example, several bytes), and the cumulative ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) of the totals can be calculated. As for the base, the number of launched game balls with respect to the number of 60000 awarded balls is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of launched game balls is calculated.

  The display monitor 29 displays the base ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), the total connection ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), and the last calculated 6000 prize balls (6000). The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls can be switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of prize balls by winning in the first starting winning opening (navel) and the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls due to winning, the number of prize balls due to winning in the first winning port and the second winning port (attacker) will be changed. If, for example, the prize balls won after displaying the connection ratio (%) for 6000 pieces are reflected on the winning combination (%) for 60000 pieces displayed after that, the prize balls for 6000 pieces are displayed. There is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur between the connection ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) of 60000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (navel), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the number of first winning opening and the second winning opening (attacker). If the number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls due to winning are input and totaled at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, a display timing of a connection ratio (%) for 6000 pieces), such a discrepancy is caused. Can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, a storage area for storing information related to a game prize is provided for each set value. The ball, the prize ball total, and the hit total are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value. For this reason, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base in the present embodiment can be individually calculated for each set value.

  In the following, as an example of the calculation method, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by the prize in the second starting prize port (Den Chu) and the first prize port and the second prize port (attacker). The calculation method of the bonus ratio (combination ratio (%)) in the case where the number of bonus balls obtained as the sum of the number of winning balls by winning is 42000 is described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total cumulative number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of the accessory acquisition balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of continuous role-acquiring balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins the attacker. The total hits refers to the cumulative number of game media hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60000. For this reason, the connection ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the winning combination can be obtained by the following equation (2). The base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

  Connection ratio = [Number of consecutive bonus balls acquired / Total number of acquisitions] × 100 (1)

  Role ratio = [(number of consecutive role-acquired balls + number of role-acquired balls) / total number of acquisitions] × 100 (2)

  Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total hits] x 100 ... (3)

  In the case where the total number of prize balls is 60000 and the number of obtained bonus balls is 42,000, the bonus ratio is obtained as 0.70 (three digits after the decimal point are cut off) by dividing 42,000 by 60000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform calculations below the decimal point, calculations using the following method are required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of the accessory acquisition balls is multiplied by 100 to be 4200000. Then, this 4200000 is divided by 60000. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, a second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be divided by 1000.

  In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a three-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the long-lived bonus ratio. That is, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is also stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of the accessory acquisition balls. The microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform an operation between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  A third calculation method that is performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lower one byte 60h is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower one byte of 10h is rounded down to 00A410h, which is the number of the accessory acquisition balls, and the number of the accessory acquisition balls is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation. Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%. In the third calculation method, the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is facilitated, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error when the total number of prize balls and the number of winning ball are 10 times is + 1%. That is, as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, the error is reduced and approximates the original value.

For example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of accessory acquired balls is 19876, the ratio of the winning combination (%) is calculated by dividing 34,821 by 19,321 as a divisor. 19876/34321 = 0.57912... It is calculated that the winning combination (%) is about 57.9%. When performing calculations in the game control microcomputer 100, calculations at the decimal point must be avoided, and therefore, are replaced by the following formulas. 198
In the division of 76/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is truncated, and 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the value after the decimal point is rounded down, it is calculated to be 57% of the duty ratio (%) and is displayed on the display monitor 29. In this example, the value calculated by the accurate calculation is different from the value calculated by the accurate calculation on the display. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (0 except the value of the most significant bit), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when it is replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, an error of + 0.3% is obtained at 32799/327 = 100.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point truncated, for example, the accurate value is 69.9%, and when the value calculated by the microcomputer for game control is 70.1%, the display is changed from 69% to 70% by 1%. Although it is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, the combination ratio (%) (or the connection ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error on the display of the error of 1%.

  In addition, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of obtained balls is divided by 100, so that the calculation cannot be performed when the total number of obtained balls is less than 100. Further, the error gradually increases even when the value is less than 32768. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1% and may be even larger. In other words, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. Therefore, until the total number of acquired balls equal to or more than a specific number (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by the counter, the display ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor. Even if the display is performed, the fact that there is a possibility that the error is large may be notified by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  The storage area in which the information regarding the winning of the game is stored may not be initialized when the clear switch AK001 or the like is operated, and may be continuously stored. This storage area includes a ring buffer, and may constitute a 10-set total buffer, a total prize ball buffer, or the like in which information relating to winning of a game stored in a ring buffer including ten counters of up to 2 bytes is totaled. . It should be noted that the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected. Initialization of the storage area for storing information related to the winning of the game when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive bonus balls obtained is larger than the value of the number of balls obtained. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display, a warning display, or the like may be performed without performing the initialization processing, or the error display or the warning display may be performed, or the initialization processing may be performed after the display.

  When the calculation of the ratio or the duty ratio has to be performed again, for example, when the calculation of the duty ratio or the duty ratio has an obstacle, the display monitor clear switch different from the clear switch AK001 is operated. By doing so, the data used for the connection ratio and the role ratio stored in the nonvolatile storage device such as the RAM 102 or the flash memory may be cleared. The display monitor clear switch only needs to be arranged on the back side surface of the game board 2 at a position, such as a predetermined position on the power supply board 17, which cannot be easily operated by game room attendants or the like. When the display monitor clear switch is operated, a display monitor clear signal different from the clear signal is transmitted to the main board 11.

The substrate case 201 is formed of a material having a light-transmitting property, and the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 are visible. The board case 201 has a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of electric components of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiating hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 29 is not blocked by the heat radiating holes. Here, “directly in front” means directly in front of the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between the main board 11 and a staff member of a game arcade who wants to view the main board 11.

  The display monitor 29 displays a winning ratio (%), a link ratio (%), and a base (%) on seven segments, and switches and displays each value every predetermined period (for example, every five seconds). I do. In this case, for example, while the position ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a game medium newly wins in the electric chute or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly changes the ratio ( %), The value of the winning combination (%) may be different from the value of the consecutive winning (%). For this reason, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated within the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed. If the numerical value that can be displayed in seven segments is two digits (for example, when two seven segments are provided), the display cannot be performed with 100% as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. Although the display monitor 29 can display a numerical value in the lower two digits, the numerical value may be displayed in this case without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits under a specific condition. In addition, it is not limited to the form in which the game medium wins are detected by sensors provided in each of the attacker and the electric chew, and the number of prize balls is individually counted based on the detection result. Using the sensor provided after the discharge path from which the game media having won the prize and the game media having won the electric chew are discharged merges, based on the detection result, the number of the prize winning balls and the number of the continuous prize winning balls May be counted.

  The main board 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2. On the back side of the gaming board 2, in addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as an effect control board 12 are also provided. The RAM 102 on the main substrate 11 includes a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth general winning number counter. A general winning number counter and a large winning number counter are provided. Note that the number of winnings in the first winning port and the second winning port (attacker) is not limited to the form in which the number of winnings is counted by the large winning counter, but the number of winnings in the first winning port is counted. A first large winning number counter and a second large winning number counter for counting the number of winnings in the second large winning opening are separately provided, and the number of winnings in the first large winning opening and the number in the second large winning opening are counted. The number of winnings may be individually counted, and the respective numbers of winnings may be summed up to be the number of winnings to the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 26A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 26B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 26C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 26D. The large winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23 and the second count switch 24A.

FIG. 8-12 shows the arrangement and display contents of the display monitor 29. The main board 11 is housed in a board case 201. The caulking pin 11B is attached to the board case 201. With the provision of the caulking pins 11B, the main board 11 is completely sealed in the board case 201, thereby preventing improper acts on the main board 11. The board case 201 is a swaged board case (hereinafter also referred to as a “swaging board case”). The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing seal 11S for proving that the main substrate 11 has been sealed is attached to the substrate case 201. The sealing seal 11 </ b> S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the board case 201. The sealing seal 11 </ b> S is arranged at a position away from the main substrate 11, and is arranged at a position different from a position where visibility of the display monitor 29 is blocked, such as directly in front of the display monitor 29. Thus, the display monitor 29 is arranged at a position that is not hidden by the sealing seal 11S.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, the display monitor 29 includes a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, a fourth display unit 29D, and a fifth display unit 29E. . Each of the first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E is composed of seven segments composed of seven segments that draw the character “8” and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. These first display portion 29A to fifth display portion 29E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while being changed in a very short cycle.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 29. The tabulated set values (1 to 3) are displayed in the first digit first display section 29A, and the tabulation period is displayed in the second digit second display section 29B and the third digit third display section 29C. The numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the fourth display unit 29D at the fourth digit and the fifth display unit 29E at the fifth digit. In display No. 1, a short-term connection ratio is displayed, and in display No. 2, a short-term winning ratio is displayed. In the display No. 3, the total ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 4, the total winning combination is displayed. Also, in display No. 5, a base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No. 6, a base (base 2) calculated based on 60000 previous prize balls is displayed. Is done. Here, the short term means a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) is 6000. The period for obtaining the total sum means the total period after starting the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio, or the total period after resetting the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio once. In the above example, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated without depending on the game state, but may be calculated in consideration of the game state. For example, the connection ratio may be a percentage of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning in the special winning opening in the jackpot game state. The winning combination is defined as a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning in the second starting winning opening during the high base state and the number of prize balls due to winning to the large winning opening during the jackpot game state. Is also good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit 29B and the second display unit 29C are displayed. “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the short-term duty ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the fourth display portion 29D and the fifth display portion 29E display the short-term winning combination as a percentage (% display). When the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed. When it is displayed, the total total winning combination is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "B6." Is displayed on the display 29B and the third display section 29C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In the fourth display section 29D and the fifth display section 29E, the total total winning combination is displayed as a percentage (% display).

  In calculating the connection ratio, the winning ratio, and the base, the main board 11 is used to calculate a first winning opening, a second winning opening (attacker), a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a first general winning opening. , The total number of game balls that have entered the fourth general winning opening and the number of game balls that have discharged from the outlet are counted. In the main processing, the CPU 103 controls the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24A, and the first general winning opening switch 26A to the fourth general A switch process is performed to check the state of each of the winning opening switch 26D and the discharge opening switch 70 (the presence or absence of a detection signal). In the switch processing, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. Then, when the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, The values of the first start winning number counter and the second start winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch 26A is added. When the detection signal is output from the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 26D, the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, The value of the third general winning number counter and the value of the fourth general winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 70, the value of the hit number counter is added. , Counts the entry number of game balls (winning number of game balls to each winning hole) to each entry area. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102. As described above, the step of counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is also executed in a series of processing for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing. Switch processing), the number of game balls entering each entry area can be counted without running a separate counting program, that is, without causing the problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

  FIG. 8-13 shows a storage area for storing the number of winning balls for each winning opening. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls due to winning in each winning opening based on the totaled number of game balls winning in each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let it. The number of prize balls obtained by winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize to the prize port by the number of wins to the prize port. The number of prize balls obtained by winning game balls is predetermined for each winning port. The number of prize balls for each of the winning ports to be classified includes a general winning port prize ball (a prize ball by winning a first general prize port to a fourth general prize port (sode)) and a first starting winning port prize ball (first The number of awarded balls in the 1st winning prize opening (navel), normal electric prize sphere (prize sphere by winning the electric chute), and special electric prize sphere (prize ball by winning the attacker) is there. The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of hit game balls. Although the CPU 103 separately counts the number of game balls won to the general winning opening and the number of game balls won to the first starting winning opening, the number of game balls winning to the general winning opening and the first starting number are also counted. The number of game ball winnings in the winning opening may be summed up. In addition, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting winning prize ball are separately calculated. The number of prize balls may be calculated together.

The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of award balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer includes ten first to tenth storage areas each including a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls in each winning port for each of the 6,000 prize balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (up to 2 bytes). The active buffer has a 0-th storage area composed of a 2-byte maximum counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning opening for each of the 6,000 winning balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases with the progress of the game, is added. The eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin. Also,
The RAM 102 has, for each winning opening, a storage area for the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and the total sum. The storage area for the total of 10 sets and the total total is composed of a counter of a maximum of 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

  The RAM 102 stores a duty combination ratio storage area for storing 10 sets and a total cumulative combination ratio and a connection ratio, a base for 10 sets (base 2), and a base for the previous 10 sets (base 1). And a base storage area. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning combination and the total ratio of the 10 sets and the total total based on the prize balls based on the winning numbers of the game balls to the respective winning ports of the 10 sets and the total total, and calculates the 10 sets and the total ratio. And the total winning combination and the connection ratio are stored in the connection winning combination storage area. Each of the connection ratio combination storage areas for storing the combination ratios and the connection ratios of the 10 sets and the total total is constituted by a counter of a maximum of 1 byte. When the combination ratio and the connection ratio of the 10 sets and the total total are stored, for example, as integers, they can be stored with a margin by a maximum 1-byte counter. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the base of 10 sets based on the number of hits of the game balls to the winning holes of 10 sets for each winning opening, and calculates the base of the 10 sets (base 2) and the last time. The base (base 1) calculated by the number of hits of the game balls to the winning holes for each of the ten sets of winning balls is stored in the base storage area. When the bases 1 and 2 are to be stored, for example, as integers, the bases 1 and 2 can be stored with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter.

  FIG. 8-14 shows a memory map of the CPU 103 on the main board 11. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing a built-in register, the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the like. The address / data signal lines of the ROM 101 are allocated to a built-in ROM area in a ROM area of a memory space (in the present embodiment, 0000H to 2FBFH among 0000H to 2FFFH. 2FC0H to 2FFFH are program management areas). Data is read from the ROM 101 by specifying this ROM area. In the present embodiment, the ROM area is managed by dividing it into eight areas of a first area to an eighth area, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H. Address / data signal lines of the built-in register are allocated to a built-in register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register and transfers data to the register via the built-in register area. Is written. Address / data signal lines of the RAM 102 are allocated to a built-in RAM area which is an RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 designates this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 Write data to the RAM 102. The other areas of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, and FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  FIG. 8-15 shows an RWM area serving as a built-in RAM area. The built-in RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 includes a RAM control area, a non-use area, a RAM data area, and other areas. A storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area includes instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. The data for the control program to be executed (which may be simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored. Reference data (for example, various lottery data) referred to by the control program is temporarily stored in a storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area.

Data used for displaying the reams and ratios is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area or the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to other areas. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total sum of the number of winning balls for each winning opening and a storage area for the total combination of the winning combinations. The storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas include an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a 1st storage area to a 10th storage area, and the number of prize balls (10 sets) for each winning opening. ) Is provided, and a storage area for 10 sets is provided. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas, data having different subroutine start addresses are stored. One byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in a storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address in the built-in RAM area, and each data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data, management data) stores one byte. If the data has more bytes (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. .

  FIG. 8-16 shows an example of display control on the display monitor 29. The main board 11 controls the display monitor 29 to display the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base. The display monitor 29 sequentially displays a plurality of items.

  FIG. 8-16 (A) is a time chart showing an aspect of a display change on the display monitor 29. When the display on the display monitor 29 is started, first, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed in green. When the display of the display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 2 is continued for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total total winning combination of the display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed. The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. Then, when the display of the display No. 6 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, from the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 to the base 2 of display No. 6, each display is sequentially changed and displayed every 5 seconds. In the display color, only the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 to the base 2 of display No. 5 are red. In this way, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative connection ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 every 5 seconds.

  FIG. 8-16 (B-1) shows a case where the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “y” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the short-term ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term connection ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 8-16 (B-2) shows a case where the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “y” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the short-term winning ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “3.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 8-16 (B-3) shows a case where the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “A” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. The fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the total cumulative connection ratio. For example, when the total cumulative connection ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 8-16 (B-4) shows a case in which the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “A” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. The total display ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 8-16 (B-5) shows a case where the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “b” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. The base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “0.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 8-16 (B-6) shows a case where the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “b” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. The base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  The display of the short-term ratio, short-term ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 can be sequentially changed for each set value based on the operation of the display changeover switch 300. I have. For example, when the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed when the set value is “1”, the operation of the display changeover switch 300 is performed. As a result, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to “2”, and the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E are displayed. The display of the total cumulative winning combination, base 1 and base 2 is changed to a display corresponding to the case where the set value is “2”. When the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed when the set value is “2”, by operating the display changeover switch 300, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to “3”, and the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative total displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E are displayed. The display of the winning combination, base 1 and base 2 is changed to a display corresponding to the case where the set value is “3”. When the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed when the set value is “3”, the display changeover switch 300 is operated. The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to “1”, and the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative total displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E are displayed. The display of the winning combination, base 1 and base 2 is changed to a display corresponding to the case where the set value is “1”.

The display monitor 29 is not limited to a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed. Only any two numerical values may be displayed. The present invention is not limited to a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 29. The history of the number of awarded balls may be displayed on the display monitor 29 without calculating the winning combination and the base. On the display monitor 29,
Only the short-term ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 are not limited to those displayed in green. The cumulative total ratio and total cumulative ratio are displayed in the same color. Base 1 and Base 2 are displayed in the same color as the short-term ratio, short-term ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative ratio. May be.

  FIG. 8-17 shows an execution example of updating in the active buffer and the ring buffer. In the main board 11, when the total prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reach the predetermined capacity of 6000, the storage in the 0th to 10th storage areas in the ring buffer is updated. Further, the storage area of the sum and total accumulation for 10 sets and the storage of the combination ratio storage area for storing the combination and the combination of 10 sets and total are respectively updated. At this time, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, and the numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are respectively stored in the second storage area. Move from the storage area to the tenth storage area. For example, the prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th to 9th storage areas are “27”, “81”, “120”, “36”, “225”, “87”, “66”, “117”, and “45”, respectively. It is "21". At this time, when the total prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reach 6000, the prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area are respectively set to “27”, “81”, “120”. "36" "225" "87" "66" "117" "45" "21". Accordingly, the number of award balls in the zeroth storage area is set to “0”, and the number of award balls in the tenth storage area is deleted. When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be temporarily deleted and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new prize ball number may be stored by overwriting the stored prize ball number.

(Explanation of game control related to other features)
FIG. 8-18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main process executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 in the present embodiment. This main processing may be executed in place of the game control main processing. In the main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step Sa1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step Sa2), and a stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step Sa3). After initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step Sa4), the RAM 102 can be accessed. (Step Sa5). In the interrupt mode 2, an address synthesized from a value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and an interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the clear switch AK001 is on based on a clear signal which is an output signal of the clear switch AK001 (step Sa6). If the clear switch AK001 is off, it is determined whether or not the power-off detection processing has been executed (step Sa7). When the power-off detection process is performed, it is determined whether or not the execution result of the parity check is normal (step Sa8). If the check result is normal, the start address of the backup setting table is set as a pointer (step Sa41), and an initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa42). As a result, the stored contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the time of the power failure regarding the progress of the game are restored.

When the power failure is restored in step Sa42, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal which is the output signal of the lock switch 51 (step AKS001). If the lock switch 51 is on in step AKS001, the setting value can be confirmed by executing the setting confirmation process (step AKS002). In the setting confirmation process, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display monitor 29.
Can be confirmed by the display. When the lock switch AK002 is off in step AKS001 or after executing the setting confirmation process in step AKS002, the process proceeds to step Sa14. When the lock switch AK002 is off in step AKS001, a command 9200H serving as a power failure recovery designation command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started in step AKS002, the setting confirmation state in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is entered, and the setting confirmation starts from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Command 9400H, which is a command, is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the game may be stopped in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the progress of the game is stopped. When the game is stopped, the firing of the game ball by the operation of the hit ball operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, and the like are stopped, and the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, The symbol display 20 may be controlled so as to stop displaying a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the execution of the setting confirmation processing in step AKS001 ends, the setting confirmation state and the game stop state accompanying the setting confirmation state end, and a command 9401H serving as a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Is done.

  If the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6, if the power cut-off detection process has not been executed in step Sa7, or if the check result is not normal in step Sa8, a predetermined RAM clear is performed. The process is executed to clear data other than the set values stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 102 (step Sa9). The storage area in which the information on the winning of the game is stored may not be cleared in step Sa9. Subsequent to step Sa9, the start address of the initialization setting table is set as a pointer (step Sa10), and an initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa11). Thereby, the storage contents relating to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are initialized. If the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 and Sa10. In addition, an operation related to initialization of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be detected.

  When the stored contents are initialized in step Sa11, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal (step Sa12). If the lock switch 51 is on in step Sa12, the setting change processing is executed (step Sa13), and the setting value can be changed. In the setting change process, it is possible to confirm the change status of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying on the display monitor 29. When the lock switch 51 is off in step Sa12, or after executing the setting change process in step Sa13, the process proceeds to step Sa14.

  If the lock switch 51 is off in step Sa12, a command 9000H serving as a RAM clear notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode in which the setting change process is executed on condition that the lock switch 51 is on, and the setting change process is executed on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable.

When the execution of the setting change processing is started in step Sa13, the setting change state is set as a change permission state in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed. Command 9100 to be a setting change start command
H is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the execution of the setting change process in step Sa13 ends, the setting change state and the accompanying game stop state end, and a command 93XXH serving as a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Is done. In addition, in addition to the case where the clear switch AK001 is on, the setting is performed if the lock switch 51 is on when the power-off inspection process is not executed or the execution result of the parity check is not normal. The setting change processing is not limited to the form in which the change processing is executed. The setting change processing may be executed when the lock switch 51 is ON only when the RAM 102 is cleared when the clear switch AK001 is ON.

  After that, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is read out (step Sa14), and the value is used as the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the random number circuit 104 is initialized by the random number circuit setting process (step Sa15). Further, a setting is made to generate a periodic timer interrupt every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step Sa16). Then, the interrupt prohibition setting (step Sa17), the display random number update processing (step Sa18), the initial value random number update processing (step Sa19), and the interrupt permission setting (step Sa20) are repeatedly executed.

  The CPU 103 performs a special symbol normal process in the special symbol process process, based on the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination. It is determined (predetermined) whether or not the change display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” before the change display result is derived and displayed. Further, when executing the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is set to any one of a plurality of types using a variation pattern determination table corresponding to the set value and numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination. May be determined. In this way, the game can be advanced so that the advantage for the player is different by determining the variable display result at a different rate according to the set value.

  In the present embodiment, when the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6 of the main process, the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 to Sa11, and then in steps Sa12 and Sa13. Although the setting value can be changed, the present invention is not limited to this. The storage contents of the RAM 102 may be initialized (cleared) after the setting value changeable state ends. . That is, if the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on in step Sa12. If it is off, the process proceeds to steps Sa9 to Sa11. The stored contents are initialized (cleared). On the other hand, if the lock switch 51 is turned on in step Sa12, a setting change process is executed in step Sa13, and after the process is completed, steps Sa9 to Sa9 are executed. The process may proceed to Sa11. For example, when the RAM clear notification command is transmitted in response to the initialization (clearing) of the storage content of the RAM 102, the initialization control board 12 starts the initialization notification in response to the reception of the RAM clear notification command. Sometimes. For this reason, if steps Sa9 to Sa11 are executed before step Sa13, when the setting change processing is executed in step Sa13 and the setting value can be changed, the initialization notification is executed and the setting is changed. There is a possibility that the change of the value may be hindered. On the other hand, the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 to Sa11 after the setting change processing in step Sa13 ends, so that the initialization notification or the like is started after the change of the set values is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent trouble in changing the set value.

FIG. 8-19 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting change process in step Sa13. As shown in FIG. 8A, the power switch AK002 is operated by a staff member of the game arcade or the like when the connection ratio, the duty ratio, the base, and the like are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the power is supplied by shutting off the power. When the display is stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 ends as shown in FIG. Thereafter, when the staff at the game arcade presses the clear switch AK001 and operates the power switch AK002 while switching the lock switch 51 on, the power supply is started by turning on the power. As shown in -19 (C), on the display monitor 29, the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 29A. When the setting changeover switch 52 is pressed down by a staff member of the game arcade or the like in a state where the set value is displayed, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is sequentially updated each time the operation is detected. To display. For example, when the pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, if “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the value is updated to “2”, and if “2” is displayed, the value is changed to “3”. The display may be updated to “1” if “3” is displayed, so that the display on the first display unit 29 </ b> A can be sequentially updated cyclically between “1” to “3”. Thereafter, when the lock switch 51 is pressed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the operation is detected, and the set value displayed on the first display unit 29A is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (update storage). I do. At this time, by blinking the first display unit 29A, the staff of the game hall or the like notifies that the new setting value has been stored so as to be recognizable.

  When the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9. Therefore, when the setting value is changed, the hold storage based on the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B is deleted. When a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the operation is detected, and the setting change process ends. The CPU 103 is in a state where a game can be played by executing the processing after step Sa14 in the main processing. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to execute a variation display result, a jackpot type, a lottery determination for a variation pattern, a payout of award balls, and the like. In the setting change process, the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 29 is not limited to the form in which the stored value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed. A predetermined set value such as “1” or “3” which is the most unfavorable set value for the player may be displayed.

  In the setting change process, the control for sequentially updating and displaying the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29 is limited to a mode of updating each time a pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Instead, for example, each time the pressing operation of the clear switch AK001 is detected, it may be sequentially updated and displayed. For example, when the clear switch AK001 is pressed on the display monitor 29 in a state where the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 29A, “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A. Is updated to “2” when “2” is displayed, updated to “3” when “2” is displayed, and updated to “1” when “3” is displayed. It suffices if the display of the display unit 29A can be sequentially and cyclically updated between "1" to "3". In this case, the clear switch AK001 used for initializing the storage contents of the RAM 102 can be commonly used for changing the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-20 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting confirmation processing in step AKS002. As shown in FIG. 8A, the power switch AK002 is operated by a staff at the game arcade or the like when the connection ratio, the duty ratio, the base, and the like are displayed on the display monitor 29, and power is supplied by shutting off the power. When the display is stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 ends as shown in FIG. Then, the power switch AK is operated while the lock switch 51 is switched on without the staff of the game arcade pressing the clear switch AK001.
When the power supply is started by turning on the power by operating 002, the display monitor 29 stores the data in the backup area of the RAM 102 in the first display unit 29A as shown in FIG. The set value is displayed. In a state where the set value is displayed, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A cannot be updated and displayed even if the setting changeover switch 52 is pressed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like. Thereafter, when a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the operation is detected, and the setting confirmation process ends. The CPU 103 is in a state where a game can be played by executing the processing after step Sa14 in the main processing. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to execute a variation display result, a jackpot type, a lottery determination for a variation pattern, a payout of award balls, and the like.

  As described above, the display monitor 29 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can display information on the game value that enables confirmation of the adjustment of the number of prize balls after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. The display monitor 29 can display information of a set value for proceeding the game so as to have a different advantage for the player, for example, by changing a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a display device for displaying the set value separately from a display device for displaying information relating to the game value, so that it is possible to prevent an increase in the manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration in the pachinko gaming machine 1. it can.

  In this embodiment, the display monitor 29 is used to display the set values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 and to display the connection ratio, the ratio, the base, and the like. The present invention is not limited to this. The display of the connection ratio, the winning combination, the base, and the like using the display monitor 29 is performed, and the setting value is displayed using the setting display unit different from the display monitor 29. Is also good. This makes it possible to clearly separate the control for displaying the connection ratio, the duty ratio, the base, and the like using the display monitor 29, and the control for displaying the set values using the setting display unit. Processing by a control program or the like can be distributed and simplified, and the control load can be reduced. As described above, when a setting display unit different from the display monitor 29 is used, the setting display unit may be disposed on a substrate different from the substrate on which the display monitor 29 is disposed, or the display monitor 29 is disposed. The setting display unit may be arranged on a substrate common to the substrate.

(Description of Modifications Related to Configuration and Game Control in Other Characteristic Units)
FIG. 8-21 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in a modification in which the setting change process can be executed during the game. The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, and the change of the set value may be executable during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the process after step Sa16 in the main process, the game machine frame 3 is opened by a game room attendant or the like, and the lock switch 51 is turned on and the clear switch AK001 is performed. Are pressed, the operation is detected, and the display monitor 29 displays the current set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the first display unit 29A. When the setting change switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed down by a person in charge of a game arcade or the like in a state where the set value is displayed, the operation is detected and displayed on the first display unit 29A. The numerical value is updated sequentially and displayed. Then, when the lock switch 51 is pressed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the operation is detected, and the set value displayed on the first display unit 29A is set as a new set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, based on the detection of the operation of switching on the lock switch 51 and the detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on. Instead, it may be changeable at the time of turning on the power, based on at least the detection of the operation of switching on the lock switch 51. For example, even when there is no detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on when the power is turned on, the storage contents of the RAM 102 are not initialized (cleared) based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. The stored contents at the time of the power failure may be restored, and thereafter, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed based on the detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on. As described above, even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not initialized by initializing (clearing) the storage contents of the RAM 102 with the start of power supply upon power-on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 at power-on is not used. Control for changing the set value that has been set may be performed.

  When a new set value is stored, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, the special figure on-hold storage, the general-purpose on-hold storage, the game control flag setting unit 152, the game control timer setting unit 153, the game control counter Various flags and data stored in the setting unit 154, the game control buffer setting unit 155, and the like may be deleted. In this manner, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, a change in the set value causes a change in the display result to become a big hit, and a new hold memory is generated. Can be prevented from being released (the occurrence of a normal drawing hit), and the fluctuation display result during execution can be prevented from becoming an unreasonable big hit. Further, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, the special winning opening is closed when the big hit game is performed, or the normal variable winning ball device 6B is closed when the normal variable winning ball device 6B is open. This can prevent the player from obtaining inappropriate profits. Further, when the setting change process is interrupted without setting a new setting value, it is possible to prevent the suspension storage from being erased even though a new setting value has not been set. Note that the present invention is not limited to the form in which the hold storage is cleared based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the set value originally set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reset. In such a case, the hold storage may be cleared. The hold storage may be cleared when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display monitor 29, that is, when the CPU 103 executes the setting change process. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from being accurately reflected on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the form in which the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening are closed based on the setting of the new setting value, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 The first special winning opening and the second special winning opening may be closed when the set value is displayed, that is, when the CPU 103 executes the setting change process. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from being accurately reflected on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 8-22 shows a display mode in a modification in which the first display unit 29 </ b> A capable of displaying the set value on the display monitor 29 is not provided. The display monitor 29 is provided with five display units from a first display unit 29A to a fifth display unit 29E, and displays the display ratio, the duty ratio, and the base displayed on the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E. The present invention is not limited to the mode in which the set values are displayed on the first display unit 29A, and it is not necessary to provide a display unit for displaying the connected ratio, the winning ratio, and the base set value being displayed. 8-22 (A), the display unit 29 displays the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base on the display unit corresponding to the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E of the display monitor 29, and corresponds to the first display unit 29A. The set value is not displayed on the display unit.

FIG. 8B illustrates an example of display control of the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the case where the display unit that displays the set value is not provided. In this case, the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base at the set value 1 are red, the connection ratio, combination ratio, and the base at the set value 2 are green, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at the set value 3 are blue. To display. By displaying the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base in different display colors according to the set values, it is possible to easily grasp which set value is the numerical value. In this display control example, similarly to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to switch and display the connection ratio, the winning ratio, and the base at the set value 1 at intervals of 5 seconds. The switching display at the interval of 5 seconds of the connection ratio, the duty ratio, and the base is changed to the switching display at the setting value of 2 and the switching display of the base at the interval of 5 seconds. It is only necessary to be able to cyclically change the display to the switching display at an interval of 5 seconds of the base. Alternatively, switching display of the connection ratio at the set value 1, the connection ratio at the set value 2, and the connection ratio at the set value 3 at intervals of 5 seconds, the combination ratio at the set value 1, the combination ratio at the set value 2, and the setting value 3 The switching display of the duty ratio at 5-second intervals, the switching display of the base at the setting value 1, the base at the setting value 2, and the switching display of the base at the setting value 3 at 5-second intervals are cyclically performed for each operation of the display switching switch 300. Various changes may be possible.

  The display monitor 29 is not limited to a form in which the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base for each set value can be displayed, but the connection ratio, combination, and combination corresponding to any one of the set values 1 to 3 are set. Only the ratio and the base may be displayed. For example, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated for each of the set values 1 to 3, and the calculated connection ratio, the winning ratio, and the base have the highest or lowest value or the longest or shortest measurement time. It is sufficient that only the value or the like can be displayed on the display monitor 29. Further, the highest or lowest value or the value with the longest or shortest measurement time among the calculated connection ratio, combination ratio, and base is set as the initial display on the display monitor 29, and the display changeover switch 300 is operated to change the initial display from the initial display. The display on the display monitor 29 may be switchable to the value of.

  The display monitor 29 displays two or more of the ratio, combination, and base at the set value 1, the ratio, combination, and base at the set value 2, and the combination, combination, and base at the set value 3. It is possible to calculate the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base in the set value, and in addition to or instead of the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base for each set value, the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base in these two or more set values are calculated. The information may be displayed on the display monitor 29. In this way, by enabling the display ratio 29, the combination ratio, and the base at two or more set values to be displayed on the display monitor 29, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be grasped in more detail. Note that the composite information is not limited to the form in which the combined ratio, combination ratio, and base are calculated for two or more set values and can be displayed on the display monitor 29. , The average value of the winning combination, and the base may be calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29.

  The display monitor 29 may be configured to be able to display only the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base according to the set value. Further, on the display monitor 29, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base according to the set values set are displayed as the initial display. The display may be switched to the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying, as predetermined information corresponding to the set value, a numerical value other than the base ratio, the winning ratio, and the base, such as the number of prize balls per predetermined time (for example, one hour).

For example, under specific conditions such as immediately after the end of a jackpot game or during a time-saving state, by using a special fluctuation pattern determination table different from the normal fluctuation pattern determination table, a fluctuation display with a specific fluctuation pattern than during normal times ( For example, the shortened non-reach variation pattern (PA1-4) may be easily executed. When the variation pattern can be determined using the special variation pattern determination table, the determination of the variation pattern using the special variation pattern determination table is terminated and switched to the normal determination according to the set value. The timing may be different. Specifically, when the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the special fluctuation pattern determination table until the fifteenth fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game, and 16 hours after the end of the big hit game. After the first time, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the normal fluctuation pattern determination table. If the set value is 2, the special fluctuation pattern determination table is used until the tenth fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game. Is used to determine the fluctuation pattern. After the end of the big hit game, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the normal fluctuation pattern determination table. If the set value is 3, the big hit game is determined. The variation pattern is determined using the special variation pattern determination table up to the fifth variation display after the end, and the normal variation pattern is used after the sixth time after the end of the big hit game. It may be determined variation pattern using the determination table.

  After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is performed in step Sa9 in the main process, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a special variation pattern is used in the first tenth variation. When the variable display is executed, it indicates that a setting value (for example, setting value 1) advantageous to the player is set, and after the initialization (clear) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the pachinko gaming machine After the setting value set to 1 is changed, if a fluctuation display is executed in a special fluctuation pattern at the 30th fluctuation, a setting value (for example, setting value 1) advantageous to the player is set. Is a game feature that focuses on whether or not the variable display is executed in a special variable pattern at a specific timing or a specific number of variable displays, such as when It may be. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has such a game characteristic, when the set value is 1, the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. After the set value has been changed, the rate of execution of the change in the special change pattern is the highest in the first tenth change, and when the set value is 3, initialization of the RAM 102 ( After the (Clear) is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the rate at which the variation is executed in the special variation pattern at the first tenth variation is minimized. Only when the set value is 1, the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. After, it is sufficient to change at a special variation pattern in the first 30 variation eyes is executed.

  The switching condition (the number of fluctuations before switching the table) for switching the fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern from the special fluctuation pattern determination table to the normal fluctuation pattern determination table differs depending on the set value. It may be determined by a ratio. Due to different switching conditions for switching the fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the set value, the determination ratio of a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, shortened non-reach (PA1-4)) decreases. Since the player can be noticed at the set timing, the effect of the variation pattern can be enhanced.

  After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is performed, or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( Until the fluctuation display (for example, 100 times) is executed, the determination ratio of the fluctuation display of the specific fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation display of the super-reach fluctuation pattern) is determined by using each fluctuation pattern determination table in a normal state. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be increased or decreased as compared with the case of determining the variation pattern. In this case, the execution of the variation display of the variation pattern of the super reach is determined at different determination ratios depending on whether the set value is 1, 2, or 3. Good. As a result, after a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is performed or a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, or Until the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the fluctuation display is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to the number of times of the fluctuation display of the super-reach fluctuation pattern. Can be increased. Further, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is performed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time elapses, or a predetermined number of times of the fluctuation display is performed. The change pattern that can be determined only until the setting is provided for each set value, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided to the player by executing the change display according to the change pattern according to these set values. The notification may be made possible.

  After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( Until the fluctuation display (for example, 100 times) is performed, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern other than the super reach such as the non-reach and the normal reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, a variation pattern different from a normal variation pattern such as a non-reach, a normal reach, a super reach, or the like (for example, an extremely short variation time of 0.1 or the like) depending on a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 The determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern or a fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation time is extremely long such as 10 minutes may be different.

  After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is performed, or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, during a specific period until the variable display of (100 times) is executed, a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested at a rate at which a specific effect is executed. For example, it is possible to execute a high setting suggestion effect indicating that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is an advantageous setting value for the player, and the setting set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for a specific period. When the value is 1 (the setting value most advantageous to the player), the high setting value suggestion effect is most easily executed, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3 (the setting value most disadvantageous to the player). ), It is only necessary to make the high setting value suggestion effect most difficult to execute. In the specific period, at least one of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach, depending on whether the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed since the last time power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was stopped. The determination ratio of the variation pattern may be different.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured as a pachinko gaming machine capable of controlling the gaming state to a positively changing state after the end of the big hit game, and the game after the big hit game based on the passing of the game ball through the third count switch during the big hit game. The state may be controllable to a probable change state. In this case, as a jackpot type, a jackpot type that opens the second big winning opening during the jackpot game, that is, a jackpot type (hereinafter, jackpot X) that allows a game ball to pass through the third count switch during the jackpot game, A jackpot type (hereinafter, jackpot Y) that does not open the second jackpot during the jackpot game, that is, a game ball that cannot pass through the third count switch during the jackpot game is provided, and the determination ratio of these jackpot X and jackpot Y May be changed according to the set value. By doing so, the rate at which the gaming state is controlled to the positive change state after the end of the big hit game can be made different according to the set value, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

  In addition to, or instead of, the rate at which the fluctuation display result becomes a big hit or the rate of determining the big hit type, the number of prize balls when a game ball wins each winning opening, or the large number in each round during a big hit game The upper limit winning number of game balls to the winning opening may be made different according to the set value. Further, the opening pattern of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening during the big hit game may be made different depending on the set value. Thereby, the number of prize balls awarded in the big hit gaming state can be made different according to the set value, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

A movable body may be provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a movable body effect of operating the movable body during a game such as a variable display or a big hit game may be executable. When such a movable body is provided, it is possible to execute variable winning initialization control such as confirmation of advancing / retracting operation of the regulating member inside the second big winning opening, and to confirm the operation of the movable body and move the movable body to the initial position. The movable body initialization control to be moved can be executed by the effect control CPU 120, and when a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, or when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, (When a new set value is set to 1), the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed. Thereby, the new set value can be accurately reflected on the operation of the regulating member and the movable body. The variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed after execution of step Sa13 or step Sa14 in the main processing. For example, the variable winning initialization control or the movable body initialization control may be executed at the timing when the first timer interrupt occurs. If the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control can be executed, the variable winning initialization control may be started at a timing before the movable body initialization control. Alternatively, the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be started at the same time, and the variable winning initialization control may be ended before the movable body initialization control. This makes it possible to appropriately perform initialization control related to winning of a game ball.

  The determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern may be different depending on the set value that has been set. The specific variable display pattern may be a variation pattern different from the variation pattern of the super reach. The setting of which variation pattern is the specific variable display pattern can be arbitrarily changed according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIGS. 8-23 and 8-24 show modified examples in which the installation positions of the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are set to the side of the main board 11. By providing the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated unless a game machine staff or the like opens the game machine frame 3. is there. In addition, by providing a security cover 500A that covers the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the pachinko machine when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed is provided. The illegal change of the set value of the gaming machine 1 may be prevented.

  The security cover 500A is attached to the lower part on the right side of the outer frame 1a. Thus, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security switch 500A approaches the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated. It can be. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the security switch 500A is separated from the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52, so that the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52 can be operated. The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are covered with a cover body from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the cover body is further covered with the security cover 500A from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. By covering from the back side of the gaming machine 1 (the cover body is pressed forward by the security cover 500A), the illegal change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed is more powerful. May be prevented. When the setting switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with a cover or a security cover 500A instead of the setting switch 52.

  FIG. 8-25 shows a modification in which a security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the security cover 500B may be slidably provided in the left-right direction with respect to the gaming machine frame 3. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500B is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and the security cover 500B is connected to the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52 on the rear side. What is necessary is just to make it immovable from the state covered from the side. Then, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be made operable by sliding the security cover 500B. When the setting switch 52 is replaced with the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500B instead of the setting switch 52.

FIG. 8-26 shows a modification in which the security cover is provided rotatably. Specifically, the left end of the security cover 500C may be rotatably supported on a vertically-oriented pivot provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 3. In such a case, when the game machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500C is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the game machine frame 3, and the security cover 500C is set to the lock switch 51. What is necessary is just to make it impossible to move from the state in which the changeover switch 52 is covered from the back side. When the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 can be operated by rotating the security cover 500C around a pivot (not shown). When the setting switch 52 is replaced with the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with a security cover 500C instead of the setting switch 52.

  When these security covers are provided so as to overlap the main substrate 11, the security cover is made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the mounting surface of the main substrate 11 and the visibility of the sealing seal are not hindered. Is also good.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 may have different gaming properties, such as a probable variable loop type and a V probable type. In the case of the probability variation loop type or the V probability variation type, a function (so-called small hit time) capable of increasing the number of possessed balls due to a small hit for opening the first big winning opening after a specific big hit game ends. You may have it. In the case of a gaming machine having the function of the small hit time, the big hit probability is made different according to the set value (for example, in the case of the set value 1, the big hit probability of the normal state is set to 1/200 and the big hit probability of the probable change state is set. Is set to 1/20, and in the case of the set value 2, the jackpot probability of the normal state is set to 1/300 and the jackpot probability of the probable change state is set to 1/30. Since the initial hit probability is higher than when other set values are set, it is easier to enter the small hit time, but the probability of a big hit during the probability change control is also higher than when other set values are set. , The small hit time is likely to end. In other words, when a small hit time function is installed in a pachinko gaming machine capable of executing the probability change control, the smaller the setting value of the big hit probability in the normal state, the higher the probability of entering the small hit time, while The hit time is difficult to continue, and the smaller the set value with the lower probability of the big hit in the normal state, the lower the probability of entering the small hit time, but the easier the small hit time. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the probability variable loop type or the V probability variation type, not only can the width of the game be expanded by mounting the function of the small hit time, but also a set value with a low big hit probability is set. Even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used, it is possible to cause the player to have an intention to play a game.

  In the case of the V-variable pachinko gaming machine 1, the opening pattern of the winning slot for determining the probability control in the round for determining the variable control is changed to the long-term opening pattern (the opening pattern in which the gaming ball can easily enter the winning slot for determining the variable control). ) And a short-term opening pattern (an opening pattern in which a game ball is unlikely to win a large winning opening for probability change control), the long-term opening pattern and the short-term opening pattern are determined according to the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, it is also possible to make the actual probability of inrush probability (ratio of probability of change) be different by determining at different ratios.

  A jackpot type determination gate is provided at a predetermined position in the game area (for example, above the second big winning opening), and the game ball passes through the jackpot type determination gate after the special symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot. The random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination may be extracted at the timing described above, and a jackpot game according to the jackpot type determined based on the extracted value of MR2 may be started. When the jackpot type determining gate is provided in this manner, the jackpot type is determined at a different rate according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, 16 round jackpots and 4 round jackpots are provided as jackpot types). If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state of the 16 round big hit is the highest, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is 3, the ratio controlled to the jackpot game state of the 16 round jackpot is the lowest.)

  The lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 may be provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3. When the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 as described above, the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 is provided on the hitting operation handle or the hitting device. Providing it in the vicinity may make it inoperable unless the glass door frame 3a is opened.

  What is determined at a different ratio according to the set value that is set may be at least a case where it is determined whether or not to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, such as at least a big hit gaming state, The variation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Depending on the set value, it is determined whether the fluctuation display result is "big hit" or "small hit" at different rates, while the big hit type is at a common rate regardless of the set value In determining the change pattern or the change pattern, the change ratio of the change pattern is not changed even if the set value is changed, so that the set value is not suggested to the player or the like, or is hardly suggested. When determining not only the fluctuation display result but also the fluctuation pattern at a different ratio according to the set value, if the set value is changed, the fluctuation pattern determination ratio is also changed. The setting value can be suggested or is easily suggested.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, the CPU 103 executes the main processing in accordance with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, so that the operation by the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 is performed. According to the detection result, it is possible to control any one of the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, the initialization state, and the power failure recovery state. The setting change state is a change permission state in which the setting change switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is operated to change the setting value. The setting confirmation state is a state where the set value set on the display monitor 29 can be confirmed. The initialization state is a state in which the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared), unlike the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. The power failure recovery state is a state in which the contents stored in the RAM 102 have been restored to the contents at the time of the power failure.

FIG. 8-27 shows an example of state control according to switch detection at power-on. When the power supply is started by turning on the power based on the operation of the power switch AK002, if the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is on, the setting change process is performed in step Sa13 of the main process. By being executed, the setting change state is controlled. In this case, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main process. On the other hand, if the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the setting confirmation processing is executed in step AKS002 of the main processing, so that the setting is performed. Controls the confirmation state. In this case, step Sa9 of the main process is not executed, and the contents stored in the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of the power failure by steps Sa41 and Sa42. If the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is on when the power supply is started, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main process, so that the initialization state is established. Control. In this case, since the lock switch 51 is determined to be off in step Sa12 of the main process, the setting change process in step Sa13 is not executed. If the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of the power failure by steps Sa41 and Sa42 of the main process. In this way, the power outage recovery state is controlled. In this case, since the lock switch 51 is determined to be off in step AKS001 of the main processing, the setting confirmation processing in step AKS002 is not executed. As described above, with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 detect various operations such as on / off switching operation and pressing operation by game room attendants and the like. , The state can be controlled according to the detection results.

(Explanation of the means relating to the above-mentioned characteristic portion)
The above embodiment includes the following features. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine capable of setting a set value, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a dedicated set value display unit for displaying the set value set is provided to prevent an increase in the cost of the gaming machine. There was a problem that can not be. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion that solves this problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the setting change process of Sa13) which can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any one of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value;
A game for providing a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a first winning opening, a second winning opening, etc.). Value providing means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a jackpot opening process);
Information display means (for example, display monitor 29, etc.) capable of displaying information relating to the game value provided by the game value provision means;
With
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29).
According to this means 1, it is not necessary to separately provide a display device for displaying the set values, so that an increase in the cost of the gaming machine is prevented. Can be.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 of the above feature,
The information display means can display predetermined information corresponding to a set value (for example, a portion on the display monitor 29 where a connection ratio, a winning combination, a base can be displayed, and the like).
The gaming machine described in Means 1 is described. In Means 2, the state of the gaming machine can be easily grasped.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 of the above-mentioned feature,
The information display means can sequentially display predetermined information of each set value (for example, the display monitor 29 displays the short-term ratio, short-term ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1, base 2). (A part displayed sequentially at 5 seconds intervals, etc.)
A gaming machine described in Means 2 is described. In Means 3, predetermined information of each set value can be easily grasped.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 of the above-mentioned characteristic portion,
The information display means can display predetermined information of each set value in different display modes (for example, in the case of the set value 1, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed in red, and in the case of the set value 2, the connection ratio, (Region ratio, role ratio, base displayed in blue, etc. at setting value 3)
A gaming machine described in the means 2 or 3 is described. In the means 4, it is possible to easily grasp predetermined information of each set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 of the above feature,
Operating means (for example, a display changeover switch 300);
The information display means can switch and display predetermined information of each set value in accordance with the operation of the operation means (for example, by operating the display changeover switch 300, the connection ratio of the set value 1, the combination ratio, the base The display is switched to the display of the connection ratio, the duty ratio and the base of the set value 2, and the display of the connection ratio, the duty ratio and the base of the set value 2 is changed to the display of the connection ratio, the duty ratio and the base of the set value 3. Switch part)
A gaming machine according to any one of the means 2 to 4 is described. In the means 5, predetermined information of each set value can be easily grasped.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 of the above-mentioned characteristic portion,
The information display means displays predetermined information corresponding to the set value set by the setting means (for example, a portion which can display only the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base corresponding to the set value set) Such)
A gaming machine according to any one of the means 2 to 5 is described. In the means 6, a task of easily confirming predetermined information of a set value set by the setting means is easily performed. be able to.

As a gaming machine of the means 7 of the above feature,
Calculation means capable of calculating information on the game value provided by the game value provision means (for example, the CPU 103 has a connection ratio (%), a combination ratio (%), a cumulative connection ratio (%), a combination A part that calculates a base (base 1 (%)) calculated based on the ratio (%) and the previous 60000 prize balls, and a base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. Etc.)
The calculating means can individually calculate the information for each set value (for example, a general winning prize ball, a first starting opening prize ball, a normal electric prize ball, a special electric prize ball, a total prize ball, The implantation total is stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value that is set, and can be individually calculated for each set value.
The information display means displays only the information corresponding to any one of the set values (for example, a connection ratio corresponding to any one of the set values 1 to 3; Role ratio, part that can display only the base, etc.)
A gaming machine described in any one of means 1 to means 6 is described. In this means 7, information can be easily checked.

As the gaming machine of the means 8 of the above-mentioned characteristic portion, a calculating means (for example, a connection ratio (%) and a winning combination (%) for 6000 CPUs 103) capable of calculating information on a game value provided by the game value providing means , And the base calculated based on the total ratio (%), the winning combination (%) and the previous 60000 prize balls (base 1 (%)), and the base calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls (Such as a part for calculating the base 2 (%)),
The calculating means can individually calculate the individual information that is the information corresponding to each set value, and can calculate the composite information that is the information corresponding to two or more different set values (for example, The information display means can display the information and the composite information (for example, a portion that calculates the combination ratio, the combination ratio, and the base that are added in two or more set values) (for example, the combination in two or more set values). A part that calculates the ratio, the role ratio, and the base so that it can be displayed on the display monitor 29)
A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7 is described, and according to this means 8, the state of the gaming machine can be grasped in more detail.

(Explanation of production control for other features)
FIGS. 8 to 28 are flowcharts illustrating an example of an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the embodiment including the above-described feature unit. This effect control main process may be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes an initialization process (step AKS011) similar to the above embodiment, and then, unlike the above embodiment, executes a power-on command process (step AKS011). AKS012). After executing the power-on command processing, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013), and if it is off (step AKS013; No), as in the above embodiment, The process of step AKS013 is repeatedly executed and the process stands by. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step AKS014), the command analysis process (step AKS015), and the effect control process process (Step AKS016) and effect random number update processing (Step AKS017) are executed in order.

  FIG. 8-29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step AKS012 as power-on command processing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 acquires an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of power supply as a received command, and determines the content thereof. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9000H serving as a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021). If the received command is not the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9200H that is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022). If it is not a power failure recovery stop command (step AKS022; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9100H serving as a setting change start command (step AKS023). If it is not a setting change start command (step AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9400H serving as a setting confirmation start command (step AKS024). If the command is not the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; No), the process returns to step AKS021, and repeats steps AKS021 to AKS024 until a reception command is acquired, and waits. If a predetermined error determination time elapses without receiving a received command, it may be notified that an error has occurred in the received command.

  If it is determined in step AKS023 that the received command is a setting change start command (step AKS023; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step AKS025). In the game stop state start time process, the progress of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game is stopped in response to the game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state start process executed in step AKS025, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for the commands other than the setting change end command, the setting for invalidating the reception is performed. do it. In this way, for example, various effects such as a variable display of effect symbols and an effect display during a big hit may be restricted so as not to be executed in accordance with the progress of the game. When the setting change start command is received, when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting change state, various effects associated with the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is not in the game stop state are not executed. Is set as a range or limit.

After executing the game stop state start process in step AKS025, control to start setting change notification is performed (step AKS026). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display a setting change notification screen based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting change notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output a setting change notification sound. Then, the control may be performed. After the control of the setting change notification is started, it is determined whether or not the setting change is to be ended (step AKS027). In step AKS027, when the command received from main board 11 is command 93XXH serving as a setting change end command, it may be determined that the setting change is to be ended. If the setting change end command has not been received and the setting change is not to be ended (step AKS027; No), step AKS027 is repeatedly executed to wait.

  If it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change is to be ended (step AKS027; Yes), control is performed to end the setting change notification (step AKS028). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5 and end the output of the setting change notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R. After the end of the setting change notification control, a game stop state end process is executed (step AKS029). In the processing at the time of the end of the game stop state, a setting may be made so that the command reception from the main board 11 which has been invalidated is made valid. Thereby, the regulation may be released so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

  Thereafter, control for executing the initialization notification is performed (step AKS030). For example, the effect control CPU 120 initializes the effect display device 5 based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the initialization notification, during an initialization notification period until a predetermined initialization notification time elapses. Control may be performed so that the notification screen is displayed and the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. If it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; Yes), the process may proceed to step AKS030 to execute the initialization notification. In this way, it is possible to notify that the storage contents of the RAM 102 have been initialized (cleared) in response to the detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 in response to the start of power supply by turning on the power.

  When it is determined in step AKS024 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step AKS031). In the game stop state start process executed in step AKS031, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for the commands other than the setting confirmation end command, the setting for invalidating the reception is performed. do it. In this way, for example, various effects such as a variable display of effect symbols and an effect display during a big hit may be restricted so as not to be executed in accordance with the progress of the game. When the setting confirmation start command is received, when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting confirmation state, various effects accompanying the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is not in the game stop state are not executed. Is set as a range or limit.

  After executing the game stop state start process in step AKS031, control is performed to start setting confirmation notification (step AKS032). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display a setting confirmation notification screen based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting confirmation notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output a setting confirmation notification sound. Then, the control may be performed. After the control of the setting confirmation notification is started in this way, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation is to be ended (step AKS033). In step AKS033, when the command received from the main board 11 is the command 9401H serving as the setting confirmation end command, it may be determined that the setting confirmation ends. If the setting confirmation end command has not been received and the setting confirmation has not been completed (step AKS033; No), step AKS033 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

If it is determined in step AKS033 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step AKS033; Yes), control is performed to end the setting confirmation notification (step AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5 and terminate the output of the setting confirmation notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, after the control of the setting confirmation notification ends, a game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS035). Thereby, the regulation may be released so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

  Thereafter, control for executing the power failure restoration notification may be performed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display a power failure recovery notification screen based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the power failure recovery notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output a power failure recovery notification sound. Then, control may be performed. Even when it is determined in step AKS022 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022; Yes), power failure recovery notification may be executed. In these cases, if it is possible to notify that the storage content of the RAM 102 has been restored to the content at the time of the power failure in response to the case where the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is not detected with the start of power supply by turning on the power supply Good.

  FIG. 8-30 shows control priorities with respect to notification and screen display by effect control in the present embodiment. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state along with the start of power supply by turning on the power, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the game stop state start process in steps AKS025 and AKS031 of the power-on command process. After the game stop state start process is executed, the reception of a command different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and regulation is performed so that control relating to normal effects is not executed. Therefore, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is the highest priority among the priorities related to the effect control. For example, the priority AKP02 of the power saving function setting screen or the like is lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. The power saving function setting screen displays the power saving function when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (game machine frame 3) is a predetermined position as a specific position. This is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device 5 in order to enable the presence / absence, type, and setting of the current date and time by RTC. Since the priority AKP03 for the magnet error notification and the like is lower than the priority AKP02 for the power saving function setting screen and the like, the priority AKP03 is lower than the priority AKP01 for the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. Since the priority AKP0Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game at the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, the priority is lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification or the setting confirmation notification. Degree.

  As described above, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is higher than the priority AKP02 of the power saving function setting screen or the like. If the setting is changed or the control to start the setting confirmation notification is performed in step AKS032, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch is temporarily switched to the specific position before the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed. Even if the output amount changeover switch is switched, the display of the power saving function etc. setting screen is not started. In this way, the display related to the set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the setting change notification screen and the setting confirmation notification screen is displayed in preference to the display related to the output amount of the effect or the output control such as the power saving function setting screen. Thereby, the display relating to the set value is appropriately performed, so that it is possible to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value.

(Explanation of Modifications Related to Effect Control in Other Features)
FIG. 8-31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect control main process executed in a modified example in which a setting confirmation process can be executed during a game. The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be checked when the power is turned on, and the check of the set value may be executable during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the processing after step Sa16 in the main processing, the game machine frame 3 is opened by a staff at the game hall or the like, and a switching operation of turning on the lock switch 51 is performed. Is detected, the display monitor 29
Then, the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the first display unit 29A. This display is not changed even if the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed down by a game room attendant or the like, and serves as a display for confirming the current set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. I have. When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started during the game, a setting confirmation state is set in which the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed. Is transmitted. When the execution of the setting confirmation process ends, the setting confirmation state ends, and a command 9401H serving as a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the effect control main process in the modified example, after performing the effect random number updating process in step AKS017, the in-progress setting confirmation process (step AKS01A) is performed, and then the process returns to step AKS013.

  FIG. 8-32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step AKS01A as the ongoing setting confirmation process. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting check is being displayed on the display monitor 29 so that the set value being set can be checked (step AKS051). In step AKS051, for example, after the control in step AKS058 is performed, it may be determined that the setting check is being performed in a period until the control in step AKS060 is performed. If the setting is not being confirmed (step AKS051; No), it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step AKS052). At this time, when the setting confirmation start command is received (Step AKS052; Yes), it is determined whether or not the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in progress (Step AKS053). In step AKS053, after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted from the main board 11, it is determined that the game is not in progress during a period from when the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received, In other periods, it may be determined that the game is in progress.

  When it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is in progress (step AKS053; Yes), the in-progress setting confirmation flag is set to an on state (step AKS054). The ongoing setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that a setting confirmation start command has been received during the progress of the game. If it is determined in step AKS052 that the setting confirmation start command has not been received (step AKS052; No), or if the in-progress setting confirmation flag is turned on in step AKS054, the customer waiting transmitted from the main board 11 is waited. It is determined whether a demonstration designation command has been received (step AKS055). At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not been received (step AKS055; No), the ongoing setting confirmation processing ends.

  If it is determined in step AKS055 that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (step AKS055; Yes), it is determined whether or not the ongoing setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056). At this time, if the ongoing setting confirmation flag is OFF (step AKS056; No), the ongoing setting confirmation processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the in-progress setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056; Yes), the in-progress setting confirmation flag is cleared and turned off (step AKS057), and control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed. (Step AKS058). Even when it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is not in progress (step AKS053; No), the process proceeds to step AKS058 to perform control to start setting confirmation notification. Thereby, when the setting confirmation start command is received during the progress of the game, the setting confirmation notification can be started after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received.

If it is determined in step AKS051 that the setting check is being performed (step AKS051; Yes), it is determined whether a setting check end command has been received (step AKS059). At this time, if the setting confirmation end command has not been received (step AKS059)
No), the in-progress setting confirmation processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS060).

  By performing such a setting confirmation process in progress, when the setting confirmation process is performed during the game and the set value set is displayed on the display monitor 29, the effect control board 12 side After receiving the customer waiting demo display command transmitted from the main board 11, the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification voice can be started. Thereby, when the set value can be confirmed during the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game, the in-progress effect is not stopped, and the inconvenience due to the confirmation of the set value can be prevented.

  In the case where the main board 11 performs the setting confirmation processing during the game, the setting confirmation state may be controlled after the customer waiting demonstration designation command can be transmitted. In this case, for example, a setting confirmation start command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 together with the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Alternatively, instead of transmitting a setting confirmation start command together with the customer waiting demonstration designation command, a dedicated command corresponding to the setting confirmation during the game is transmitted, and after the progress of the game is completed, the set value which is set May be controlled in a state in which can be confirmed.

  Alternatively, the set value that has been set is displayed on the display monitor 29 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the effect display device 5 does not need to perform display corresponding to the set value. Therefore, when the setting confirmation process is executed during the game, the main monitor 11 does not transmit a setting confirmation start command or the like to the effect control board 12 and displays a display on which the setting value can be confirmed on the display monitor 29. Control for starting may be performed. In this case, on the effect control board 12, control by the effect control CPU 120 or the like may be performed so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game is continued.

  In addition to the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification, the setting change end notification and the setting confirmation end notification may be made executable. For example, in the power-on command processing, the setting change notification is ended by the control in step AKS028, the setting change end notification is started with the start of the setting change end notification period, and the setting change end notification period is ended. The setting change end notification may be ended. In the power-on command processing, the setting confirmation notification is terminated by the control in step AKS034, the setting confirmation termination notification is started with the start of the setting confirmation termination notification period, and the setting confirmation termination notification period is terminated. The setting confirmation end notification may be ended.

In the setting change notification, control may be performed so that the setting change notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5. In the setting confirmation notification, control may be performed such that the setting confirmation notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5. Alternatively, in the setting change notification, in addition to the display of the setting change notification screen and the output of the setting change notification sound, or in place of part or all, a part or all of the light emitting members of the game effect lamp 9 or the game effect lamp 9 Control may be performed such that an arbitrary light-emitting member such as a notification lamp provided separately from the light-emitting member emits light in a predetermined setting change notification mode. In the setting confirmation notification, in addition to the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification sound, or instead of part or all, instead of part or all of the game effect lamp 9, part of the game effect lamp 9 Alternatively, control may be performed such that all light-emitting members or an arbitrary light-emitting member such as a notification lamp provided separately from the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a predetermined setting confirmation notification mode. As described above, the setting change notification only needs to be able to notify that the setting value can be changed using an arbitrary effect device or a notification device different from the effect device. The setting confirmation notification only needs to be able to report that the setting value can be confirmed using an arbitrary rendering device or a reporting device different from the rendering device. Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode in which the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification are performed, and may be one in which one or both of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification are not performed.

  The present invention is not limited to the form in which the command 93XXH serving as the setting change end command and the command 9401H serving as the setting check end command are used. A common setting end command is used as the setting change end command and the setting check end command. May be used. In this case, in the power-on command processing, in step AKS027, it is determined that the setting change is completed when the setting end command is received, and in step AKS033, the setting confirmation is ended when the setting end command is received. Then, it may be determined.

(Explanation about the feature part 71AK)
FIG. 8-33 shows a configuration example of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 regarding the characteristic portion 71AK of this embodiment. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be provided on the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the upper right portion of the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is operable from the outside via an opening formed in a board case accommodating the effect control board 12. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be a rotary switch capable of detecting a predetermined operation such as a switch switching operation for initializing a predetermined effect output or the like. The effect output initially set by the output amount switch 71AK001 only needs to include at least the volume of the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, the light emission amount of a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be included. For example, when the game room staff opens the gaming machine frame 3, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 becomes operable. As described above, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is a condition that the initial setting of the effect output can be changed when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 initially sets the effect output to one of a plurality of stages. Further, depending on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, it is switched using the stick controller 31A or the like whether to permit or prohibit the effect output change adjustment by the player. The effect control CPU 120 may store data indicating such effect output settings in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 as output setting information.

  As shown in FIG. 8-33 (B), the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 has a total of 16 channels from “0” to “F”. The corresponding switch position can be switched. In the present embodiment, the volume is initially set to one of six levels according to whether the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is between “0” and “F”, and the volume is adjusted by the player. Whether to permit is switched. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is connected to the effect control CPU 120 directly or via a predetermined circuit, and the changeover switch signal indicating the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is input to the effect control CPU 120 to correspond to the channel. The switch position can be specified.

FIG. 8-34 shows the initial setting control 71AKC01 such as effect output according to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. In the initial setting control 71AKC01, for example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “5”, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is determined according to “volume 6 (maximum)”. The upper limit sound volume is initially set to “97.0”, and is controlled so that the sound volume setting (adjustment) by the player is possible (permitted). The volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited to the volume, and the output amount of an arbitrary effect device such as the light amount of the game effect lamp 9 may be initially set according to the switch position of the output amount switch 71AK001. . When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any one of "6" to "F", the volume setting (adjustment) by the player is disabled (prohibited), and the effect is produced by the initially set effect output. Is executed. Further, in response to the case where the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “F”, a setting screen such as a power saving function can be displayed on the effect display device 5, and the presence or absence and type of the power saving function (power saving mode); The value indicating the current date and time can be set (changed) by the RTC 126.

  As described above, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted. In addition, it is possible to control the output amount of the effect to one of a plurality of stages. The effect control CPU 120 executes a process for controlling the output amount of the effect to one of a plurality of stages based on a switch signal capable of specifying the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

  FIG. 8-35 shows an execution example of the setting change notification, the setting confirmation notification, and the initialization notification with respect to the characteristic unit 71AK. In this execution example, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (A), as a setting change notification, a setting change notification screen 71AKD01 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and a setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. . As the setting confirmation notification, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (B), a setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and a setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As the initialization notification, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (C), the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the initialization notification sound 71AKE03 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the characteristic unit 71AK, a power-on command process is executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main process, as in the above embodiment. In the power-on command processing, the setting change notification is started by the control in step AKS026, and the setting change notification is ended by the control in step AKS028. The setting confirmation notification is started by the control in step AKS032, and the setting confirmation notification is ended by the control in step AKS034. Further, by the control in step AKS030, the initialization notification starts at the start of the initialization notification period, and ends at the end of the initialization notification period. The setting change notification screen 71AKD01, the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02, and the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 are not limited to being displayed on the entire display area of the effect display device 5, but may be part of the display area of the effect display device 5. May be displayed.

  The characteristic section 71AK is provided with an output amount changeover switch 71AK001, and can perform an initial setting such that the effect output such as volume is one of a plurality of stages corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. On the other hand, the audio output in the setting change notification, the setting confirmation notification, and the initialization notification is at the maximum volume that can be output by the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the initial volume setting corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. What is necessary is just to output at a certain "volume 6 (maximum)" (upper limit volume "97.0"). For example, in the setting change notification, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 for notifying the message “Setting is being changed” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the setting confirmation notification, a setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 for notifying a message “Setting is being confirmed” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the initialization notification, the initialization notification sound 71AKE03 for notifying a message "initialized" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume.

As described above, in response to the operation of switching the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, the operation relating to the adjustment of the effect output is detected, and based on the detection, the output amount of the effect is controlled to one of a plurality of stages. In the setting change notification serving as the notification regarding the change of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the output of the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is performed based on the maximum volume that is a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the effect output adjustment. .
In the setting confirmation notification and the initialization notification, as the output of the setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 and the initialization notification sound 71AKE03, the notification may be performed based on the maximum volume that is a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the effect output adjustment. As described above, since the notification is performed based on the common output amount, it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed in accordance with the change or confirmation of the set value and the initialization (clearing) of the stored contents in the RAM 102.

  FIG. 8-36 shows a display example in the case where the player volume adjustment, the power saving function setting, and the like are performed for the characteristic portion 71AK. For example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “0” and the effect output has not been adjusted by the player yet, the volume setting is “volume 1 (minimum)”. FIG. 8-36 (A) shows a player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 includes an effect image indicating six memories corresponding to six levels of volume, and changes the display color of each memory according to the current volume. For example, when the volume setting is “volume 1 (minimum)”, one memory is displayed in a first display color (for example, red), and the remaining five memories are displayed in a second display color (for example, white). . At this time, in response to the operation of tilting the operation stick (lever) of the stick controller 31A to the right being detected, the volume setting is changed to “volume 2”, and the first volume is set on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11. The display color memory is increased by one. In this manner, each time the first operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the first direction (right direction, etc.) is detected, a plurality of stages of effects are performed until the effect output setting reaches the maximum. What is necessary is just to change so that the output amount may be increased by one step. On the other hand, each time the second operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the second direction (left direction) is detected, the effect output amount in a plurality of stages is set until the effect output setting reaches a minimum. What is necessary is just to change it so that it may decrease by one step.

  When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “F”, the power saving function and the value of the RTC 126 can be set. FIG. 8-36 (B) shows a power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 includes a display area for setting the power saving function and a display area for setting the value of the current date and time (current time) by the RTC 126. When the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 is displayed, the presence or absence and the type (power saving mode) of the power saving function are determined in accordance with the detection of the operation of the game room staff or the like operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. In addition, the RTC 126 sets (changes) a value indicating the current date and time. The effect control CPU 120 executes processing for setting (changing) the power saving function and the like based on the display of the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 and detection of the operation of changing each setting. For example, when "power saving mode A" is selected in the display of the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12, the control for activating the power saving function is performed only during the customer waiting demonstration in which the demonstration screen is displayed. Whatever is performed is sufficient. Further, when it is set to select “power saving mode B” on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, for example, the luminance of the game effect lamp 9 is displayed during the execution of the fluctuation display in addition to the demonstration waiting for customers. Any control may be used as long as control for activating the power saving function, such as lowering (light emission amount), is performed.

FIG. 8-37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 for the characteristic portion 71AK. This effect control main processing may be executed in place of the effect control main processing in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 71AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes an initialization process (step 71AKS011) and a power-on command process (step 71AKS012), similarly to the above-described embodiment. The initialization process of step 71AKS011 is a process corresponding to the initialization process of step AKS011 in the above embodiment, and the power-on command process of step 71AKS012 is a process corresponding to the power-on process of step AKS012 in the above embodiment. Should be fine. After executing the power-on command processing of step 71AKS012, unlike the above-described embodiment, the start-time output switching processing (step AKS013) is executed. Thereafter, similarly to the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014). If it is off (step 71AKS014; No), the process of step 71AKS014 is repeatedly executed. Wait. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step 71AKS015), the command analysis process (step 71AKS016), and the effect control process process (Step 71AKS017), and the effect random number updating process (Step 71AKS018) are sequentially executed. Further, in the effect control main processing of the characteristic unit 71AK, the ongoing output change processing (step 71AKS019) is executed, and then the process returns to step 71AKS014.

  FIG. 8-38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step 71AKS013 as the start-time output switching processing. In the start-time output switching process, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the switch position based on the switch signal from the output amount switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS031). At this time, it is determined whether the specified switch position is “F” (Step 71AKS032). When the switch position is other than “F” (Step 71AKS032; No), control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is performed by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (Step 71AKS033), and the output at the start is performed. The switching process ends. In step 71AKS033, for example, initial output setting data indicating a switch position corresponding to a channel can be specified in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  When it is determined in step 71AKS032 that the switch position is “F” (step 71AKS032; Yes), control for starting setting of the power saving function and the like is performed (step 71AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control such that the effect display device 5 displays the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting of the power saving function and the like. After the control for setting the power saving function and the like is started in this way, it is determined whether the setting is completed (step 71AKS035). In step 71AKS035, when the selection of the item indicating “end” is determined on the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12, it may be determined that the setting is completed. If this setting is not completed (Step 71AKS035; No), control corresponding to the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (Step 71AKS036), and the process returns to Step 71AKS035. In step 71AKS036, the display on the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 can be changed according to the detection of the operation of tilting the operation stick (lever) of the stick controller 31A, the detection of the operation of pressing the push button 31B, and the like. Control may be performed as described above.

  When it is determined in step 71AKS035 that the setting has been completed (step 71AKS035; Yes), control for ending the setting of the power saving function and the like is performed (step 71AKS037), and the start-time output switching process ends. In step 71AKS037, for example, the production control CPU 120 stores power saving function data indicating the presence or absence and the type (power saving mode) of the power saving function in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the like. Further, when the setting for changing the value of the RTC 126 is performed, data indicating the changed value is set in the RTC 126.

FIG. 8-39 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step 71AKS019 as the ongoing output change processing. In the in-progress output change process, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a switching permission condition has been satisfied (step 71AKS051). The switching permission condition may be predetermined as a condition for permitting adjustment of the effect output using the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 during execution of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the switching permission condition may be satisfied. If such a switching permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051; Yes), the switch position is detected based on the switch signal from the output amount switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS052). Based on the detection result, it is determined whether or not the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053). For example, the effect control CPU 120 compares the switch position indicated in the initial output setting data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 with the switch position specified from the changeover switch signal, and when the comparison result does not match, It is sufficient to determine that the switch position has been changed.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS053 that the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053; Yes), it is determined whether or not the changed switch position is “F” (step 71AKS054). At this time, if the switch position is other than “F” (Step 71AKS054; No), control is performed to switch the initial setting of the output amount by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (Step 71AKS055). In step 71AKS055, for example, the initial output setting data indicating the switch position corresponding to the channel can be stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS054 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS054; Yes), control to start setting of the power saving function and the like is performed (step 71AKS056). In this case, the same processing as in steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037 of the start-time output switching processing may be performed. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting has been completed (step 71AKS057). If the setting has not been completed (step 71AKS057; No), control corresponding to the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS058), and step 71AKS057. Return to Thereafter, when the setting is completed (Step 71AKS057; Yes), control for ending the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (Step 71AKS058).

  When the switching permission condition is not satisfied in step 71AKS051 (step 71AKS051; No), when the switch position is not changed in step 71AKS053 (step 71AKS053; No), control is performed in step 71AKS055 or step 71AKS059. After the execution, it is determined whether or not the player can adjust the volume or the like based on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS060). In step 71AKS060, when the current switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any one of “0” to “5”, the volume setting (adjustment) by the player is possible (permitted). It may be determined that the adjustment by the player is possible. If the adjustment by the player is impossible (prohibited) (step 71AKS060; No), the ongoing output change process ends. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to determining whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied in step 71AKS051, and the switch position may be detected in step 71AKS052 without performing the determination in step 71AKS051.

If it is determined in step 71AKS060 that the adjustment by the player is possible (step 71AKS060; Yes), it is determined whether an operation for changing the output amount of the effect has been detected (step 71AKS061). In step 71AKS061, for example, when the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 is displayed, the detection of the operation of changing the effect output amount in a plurality of stages based on the detection result of the operation of operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is performed. What is necessary is just to determine whether there was. If such an operation is not detected (step 71AKS061; No), the ongoing output change process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that an operation has been detected (step 71AKS061; Yes), control is performed to adjust the output amount according to the detection result (step 71AKS062), and the ongoing output change process ends. In step 71AKS062, the player volume adjustment screen 71AK
In D11, when an operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected, update output setting data indicating the changed volume setting and the like may be stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

(Explanation of Modified Example Regarding Characteristic Part 71AK)
FIG. 8-40 shows a priority of control regarding notification by effect control, screen display, and the like in a modification of the characteristic portion 71AK. The pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to change the setting with the start of power supply by turning on the power. On the other hand, when the power is turned on and the power supply is started, when the setting is controlled to the confirmation state, the game may be controlled so as not to be in the game stop state. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the processing at the start of the game stop state in step AKS031 of the command processing at the time of power-on. The input of the changeover switch signal capable of specifying the switch position may be enabled. In this case, the setting change notification priority 71AKP11 is the highest priority among the priorities relating to the effect control, and is higher than the priority 71AKP12 for the power saving function setting screen or the like. On the other hand, the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen or the like. Since the priority 71AKP1Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game at the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, the priority AKP11 of the setting change notification and the setting screen for the power saving function etc. The priority is lower than the priority 71AKP12 and the priority AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification.

  As described above, the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen for the power saving function or the like, and therefore, when the control for starting the setting change notification is performed in step AKS026 of the power-on command processing. Before the end of the setting change, even if the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is switched to the specific position of “F” even if the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected. First, the display of the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 is not started. On the other hand, the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen or the like. Therefore, when the control to start the setting confirmation notification is performed in step AKS032 of the power-on command processing, When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is switched to the specific position of “F” before the end of the setting confirmation, the power saving is performed based on the detection of the operation of switching the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. The display of the function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 may be started. As described above, when the setting value is changed, the control for switching the initial setting of the effect output amount is not executed, while when the set value is confirmed, the control for switching the initial setting of the effect output amount may be executed. . Thereby, in order to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value, it is possible to appropriately control the stage of the output amount of the effect together with the confirmation of the set value.

By executing the power-on command processing in step 71AKS012 and then performing the start-time output switching processing in step 71AKS013, it is possible to detect the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 in the setting change state. Regardless, the present invention is not limited to the mode in which the control of the output amount of the effect is not executed, and it is determined whether or not the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount switch 71AK001 is detected in the power-on command processing. When the operation is detected, information indicating the switch position can be specified is stored, and after the setting change state is completed, the output amount of the effect is controlled based on the stored information. May be used. For example, in the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, if it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change has not been completed, the switch position is specified based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. At this time, information indicating the result of specifying the switch position is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Thereafter, in step 71AKS031 of the start-time output switching process, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be specified based on the information indicating the result of specifying the switch position. Also in this case, in the setting change state, it is possible to limit the control of the output amount of the effect, regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

  Alternatively, in the case of the setting change state, it is determined whether or not the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is a specific switch position, such as whether or not the switch position is "F". Alternatively, the control for displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 on the effect display device 5 may be prioritized over the control for displaying the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 on the effect display device 5. In this case, when the setting change notification is ended by the control in step AKS028 of the power-on command processing, the control for displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01, which has been given priority, on the effect display device 5 is also ended. It is only necessary that the display device 5 can start displaying the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12.

  Unlike the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, a detection device capable of detecting an operation performed by a player in a predetermined operation is provided, and a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed based on the detection of the operation by the detection device. Is also good. For example, in addition to or instead of the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001, a setting value change switch capable of detecting an operation such as a switching operation or a pressing operation by the player is provided, and the operation of the player is detected by the setting value change switch. In the same manner as when the operation is detected by the clear switch AK001, the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed.

  As described above, in the effect control main processing of the characteristic portion 71AK, the power-on command processing is executed in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment in step 71AKS012, and the start-time output switching processing is executed in step 71AKS013. In the power-on command processing, for example, a game stop state start processing is executed in step AKS025 or step AKS031. After the game stop state start process is executed, the reception of a command different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and regulation is performed so that control relating to normal effects is not executed. In this case, the input of the changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is also invalidated, and the effect output adjustment and the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 are not displayed according to the switch position. The control based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is restricted (prohibited). In this way, when the power supply is started and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state in which the change of the set value is permitted, regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the output amount of the effect, The execution of the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is restricted (prohibited). Thereby, the control for changing the set value is given priority over the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect, so that it is possible to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  The effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of the effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect control CPU 120 is provided on the effect control board. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, and receives an operation related to adjustment of the output amount of the effect by the knob 71AK002. This makes it possible to appropriately switch the initial setting of the output amount of the effect in order to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

In the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 71AK, the power-on command process is executed in step 71AKS012, and then the start-time output switching process is executed in step 71AKS013. In the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013, control is performed at step 71AKS033 to switch the initial setting of the effect output according to the switch position, or control is performed at steps 71AKS034-71AKS037 to set the power saving function and the like. In this manner, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply, if the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected before the setting change state ends, After the setting change state ends, control is performed to the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount switch 71AK001. This makes it possible to appropriately switch the initial setting of the output amount of the effect in order to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  When the setting change notification is performed by the display screen of the effect display device 5 or the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is output regardless of the initial volume setting corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. Is output at the maximum volume that can be output by the pachinko gaming machine 1. As described above, the notification is performed using the common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, thereby preventing the trouble of the setting value changing operation. Can be prevented from being performed. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic portion 71AK)
Regarding the above-described characteristic portion 71AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for a player is described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine capable of changing settings related to effects, there is a gaming machine described in, for example, JP-A-2015-29614. However, in the technology described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29614, while changing a plurality of settings having different advantages, control when changing the setting of the effect is not considered. Was. For this reason, there is a possibility that the operation of changing to a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player may be affected. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 71AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in a work of changing a set value,
A gaming machine (eg, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that performs a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 executing steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting a change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Effect-adjustment detecting means (for example, an output-amount changeover switch 71AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation relating to adjustment of the output amount of the effect;
Output amount control means for controlling the output amount of the effect in any of a plurality of stages based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means (for example, the output switching process at the start in step 71AKS013 or the output change process in progress in step 71AKS019). Effect control CPU 120 to be executed), and
Limiting means for limiting the execution of control by the output amount control means regardless of detection of operation by the effect adjustment detection means when the change is permitted (for example, step AKS012 is executed as a power-on command process of step 71AKS012). Effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, the execution of the control by the output amount control means is restricted when the change is permitted, so that it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
Effect control means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) for controlling execution of effects in accordance with the progress of the game;
An effect control board (for example, an effect control board 12 or the like) provided with the effect control means,
The effect control board further includes a receiving unit (for example, a knob 71AK002 of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 or the like) for receiving an operation detectable by the effect adjustment detecting unit.
The game machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 71AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value while appropriately controlling the output amount of the effect.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
The output amount control means, when an operation is detected by the effect adjustment detecting means before the change permission state ends, after the change permission state ends, the operation by the effect adjustment detection means ends. Is controlled to the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of (for example, execution of the output switching process at the start in step 71AKS013).
The game machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 71AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value while appropriately controlling the stage of the output amount of the effect.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
Unlike the operation of the player during the game, the game device includes an initializing detection unit (for example, a clear switch AK001) capable of detecting an operation related to the initialization of the gaming machine,
When the change is permitted, the set value by the setting means can be changed according to the detection of the operation by the initialization detecting means (for example, when a clear switch AK001 is used instead of the setting changeover switch 52, etc.). ),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a trouble in the operation of changing the set value without separately providing a configuration for changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
Change notification means (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) for notifying change of the set value by the setting means;
The change notifying unit performs a notification (for example, output of a setting change notification sound 71AKE01) with a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting unit.
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered while preventing the setting value from being changed due to fraud.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
A setting confirmation control unit (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting confirmation process in step AKS002) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state for confirming a setting value set by the setting unit;
The output amount control means,
In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to control the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means (for example, the setting confirmation notification priority higher than the priority 71AKP13. Priority 71AKP12 etc.),
In the change permission state, the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means is not controlled (for example, the priority of the setting change notification higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen such as the power saving function). 71AKP11 etc.),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 5 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK.
In such a configuration, the stage of the output amount of the effect can be controlled together with the confirmation of the set value, but when the set value is changed, the stage of the output amount of the effect is not controlled. Problems can be prevented from occurring.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 72AK)
FIG. 8-41 shows an execution example of the power-on operation by the movable member driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The movable members driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 include a first movable member serving as a first movable effect device and a second movable member serving as a second movable effect device. The first movable member stops at the lower left position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retreat position). From the retracted position, it rises diagonally to the upper right, stops at an advanced position overlapping the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and then performs an operation effect of returning to the retracted position again. The first movable member includes a rotation mechanism, first to third split pieces, and a slide mechanism. First to third split pieces are provided at the tip of the rotating mechanism. The first to third fragments form a predetermined figure at the time of the origin when the united closed state is set. The rotating mechanism of the first movable member is rotated by the operation motor AK011 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position at the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5. Thus, after the first movable member has advanced to the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5, the first to third fragments are opened by the operation motor AK012. On the other hand, when the first movable member is at the origin position, the first to third fragments cannot be opened. The slide mechanism of the first movable member is slid laterally by the operation motor AK013 after the rotation mechanism of the first movable member and the first to third split pieces are rotated to the advanced position. The slide mechanism of the first movable member sets the rotation mechanism and the first to third split pieces on the left side of the effect display device 5 with the origin position when the first movable member is at the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5. It is only necessary to be able to slide between the position and the right position.

  The second movable member stops at the position above the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retreat position). After descending from the evacuation position and stopping at the advance position overlapping the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, an operation effect of returning to the evacuation position again is performed. The second movable member is lowered by the operation motor AK014 from the evacuation position, which is the origin position, to the advancing position slightly above the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and is raised from the advancing position to the evacuation position. In this way, the second movable member performs an effect operation of simply reciprocating up and down by the driving force of the operation motor AK014.

The origin position of the turning mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK021. The origin positions of the first to third fragments of the first movable member are detected by the origin sensor AK022. The origin position of the slide mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK023. The origin position of the second movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK024. The operation motor AK011 provides a driving force that enables the rotation mechanism of the first movable member to move between the origin position and the advanced position. The operation motor AK012 provides a driving force that enables the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to move between the closed state and the open state at the origin position. The operation motor AK013 provides a driving force that enables the slide mechanism of the first movable member to move between the origin position and the left or right position of the effect display device 5. The operation motor AK014 is the second motor.
A driving force is provided that enables the movable member to move between an origin position and an advanced position.

  The power-on operation by the first movable member and the second movable member includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The long initial operation is an initial operation for performing the same operation as a normal effect operation during execution of an effect accompanying the progress of a game. By executing the long initial operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not a failure occurs in the normal effect operation. The short initial operation is an operation in which a part of the operation in the normal effect operation is omitted, and is a return operation for returning the first movable member or the second movable member to the origin position.

  When the long initial operation is performed as the power-on operation, first, as shown by a solid arrow 72KM01, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is moved to the origin position (retreat position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. Is moved to the overlapping position on the front side of the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5 which is the advance position from the position. Subsequently, as shown by a broken arrow 72AKM02, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the closed state at the origin position to the open state by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Thereafter, as shown by a broken arrow 72AKM03, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the open state to the closed state (the origin position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Next, as indicated by solid arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06, the slide mechanism of the first movable member is moved from the origin position to the right movable position by the driving force of the operation motor AK013, and then moved to the left movable position. Then return to the origin position. Then, as shown by the solid line arrow 72AKM07, the rotating mechanism of the first movable member is returned from the advanced position to the original position (retreat position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. Thereafter, as shown by broken-line arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09, the second movable member is moved from the origin position (retreat position) to the advance position by the driving force of the operation motor AK014, and then returned to the origin position (retreat position).

  When the short initial operation is performed as the power-on operation, an operation in which a part of the long initial operation is omitted may be performed. For example, among the operations indicated by arrows 72AKM01 to 72AKM09, control is performed to execute the operations indicated by broken-line arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, and 72AKM09. In this case, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member cannot be moved from the closed state to the open state unless the rotation mechanism of the first movable member moves to the advanced position. Therefore, even in the short initial operation, the operation indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07 is required. Further, in the long initial operation, the operations of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member and the operations of the second movable member are performed so that the moving amount is larger than the operations indicated by the dashed arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, and 72AKM09. May be performed. In the short initial operation, the slide mechanism of the first movable member may be moved so that the movement amount is smaller than the operation indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06.

  In the short initial operation, at least a part of the operation may be omitted or added according to the detection result by the origin sensors AK021 to AK024. For example, when the origin sensor AK022 is off and the other origin sensors are on, the operation of moving the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to the closed state, which is the origin position, is indicated by a broken arrow 72AKM03. The operation motor AK012 is driven to move in the direction. Then, when the origin sensor AK022 is turned on, the driving of the operation motor AK012 may be stopped. Thereafter, by moving the rotation mechanism of the first movable member so as to be smaller than the movement amount indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07, the origin sensor AK021 is once turned off and then turned on. The motor AK021 is driven. In addition, by moving the second movable member as indicated by broken-line arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09, the operation motor AK024 may be driven so that the origin sensor AK024 is once turned off and then turned on.

  FIG. 8-42 shows a control pattern used for driving the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The pattern data constituting these control patterns may be stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 in advance. In this embodiment, a short initial control pattern 72AKP01, a long initial control pattern 72AKP02, an effect operation A control pattern 72AKP11, and an effect operation B control pattern 72AKP12 are prepared in advance as control patterns of the movable member.

  The short initial control pattern 72AKP01 is a control pattern used to execute a short initial operation. The long initial control pattern AKP02 is a control pattern used to execute a long initial operation. The effect operation A control pattern 72AKP11 is a control pattern used to execute the operation of the movable member included in the first effect performed along with the progress of the game, such as a reach effect. The production operation B control pattern 72AKP12 is a control pattern used to execute the operation of the movable member included in the second production different from the first production performed with the progress of the game, such as a notice production, for example. . In addition, as the control pattern of the movable member, more control patterns may be prepared, or some control patterns may be prepared. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the drive contents of the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the pattern data read from the ROM 121, and control the operation of the movable member.

  FIG. 8-43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characteristic portion 72AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command processing only needs to be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the above embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 72AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines a command received from the main board 11 as in the above-described embodiment (steps 72AKS001 to 72AKS004). If it is determined in step 72AKS003 that the received command is a setting change start command (step 72AKS003; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step 72AKS005), as in the above-described embodiment. Control for starting notification is performed (step 72AKS006).

  After performing the control in step 72AKS006, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS007). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the short initial control pattern 72AKP01 from a predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS007, it is possible to perform control for executing a return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting change state is set as the change permission state. Note that, even in a period after the process proceeds to step 72AKS008 or later, the control in step 72AKS007 may be continuously performed until the short initial operation period ends, and control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

  Subsequent to the control in step 72AKS007, it is determined whether or not the setting change is to be terminated (step 72AKS008), as in the above embodiment. If the setting change is not to be ended (step 72AKS008; No), step 72AKS008 is repeatedly executed and the process stands by. When it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended (step 72AKS008; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step 72AKS009), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS010).

After executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS010, unlike the above-described embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS011), and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014. In step 72AKS011, for example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the long initial control pattern 72AKP02 from a predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By performing the control in step 72AKS011, it is possible to perform control for executing the long initial operation as the initial operation of the movable member after the setting change state as the change permission state ends. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS011, when the setting change state is set as the change permission state, the long initial operation as the initial operation is executed following the short initial operation as the return operation. No control can be performed. Note that, even after the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS011 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 72AKS001; Yes), control for executing a short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS012), and control for executing a long initial operation is performed. (Step 72AKS013). In step 72AKS013, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS012 is completed. By executing the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, the long initial operation as the initial operation follows the short initial operation as the return operation. Control for executing the operation can be performed. Note that, even after the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS013 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by common processing using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

  Thereafter, control for executing the initialization notification is performed (step 72AKS014). The control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. When it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, control for executing the initialization notification may be performed before control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS012. .

  If it is determined in step 72AKS004 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step 72AKS004; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step 72AKS015), as in the above-described embodiment. Control for starting notification is performed (step 72AKS016). Subsequently, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS017). By executing the control in step 72AKS017, the control for executing the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position when in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 It can be performed. Note that, even in the period after the process proceeds to step 72AKS018 or later, the control in step 72AKS017 may be continuously performed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

Subsequent to the control in step 72AKS017, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation is to be ended, similarly to the above embodiment (step 72AKS018). If you do not finish checking the settings,
Step 72AKS018; No), and repeatedly execute Step 72AKS018 to stand by. If it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step 72AKS018; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 72AKS019), and a game stop state end process is executed (step 72AKS020).

  After executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS020, unlike the above-described embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS021), and the power-on command processing ends. When the control in step 72AKS021 is executed, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed, the long initial operation as the initial operation of the movable member is executed. Control can be performed. In addition, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS021, the long initial operation which is the initial operation is performed after the short initial operation which is the return operation when the setting is in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value. Is not performed. Note that, even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 72AKS021 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step 72AKS002; Yes), control to execute a short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS022), and then control to execute a long initial operation. (Step 72AKS023), and then the power-on command processing ends. In step 72AKS023, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS022 is completed. By executing the control in steps 72AKS022 and 72AKS023, when the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of power supply, the long initial operation is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. Control for executing the operation can be performed. Note that, even after the power-on command processing ends, the control in step 72AKS023 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

(Explanation of Modified Example Related to Characteristic Part 72AK)
FIG. 8-44 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the power-on command processing executed in the modification of the characteristic unit 72AK. In the power-on command processing in this modified example, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 72AKS001; Yes), the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010. Thereafter, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS031), control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS032), and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014 to perform control for executing the initialization notification. If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the contents stored in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 are initialized (cleared) with the start of power supply by turning on the power. Correspondingly, the control at step 72AKS014 is executed to execute the initialization notification. When this initialization notification is executed, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that the control to execute the long initial operation as the initial operation following the short initial operation as the return operation can be performed. . Further, even after executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS010, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that the setting change state as the change permission state ends and the short-circuiting operation in which the return operation is performed. Subsequent to the initial operation, control for executing a long initial operation as an initial operation can be performed. As described above, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 and after the game stop state ending process is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in common steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed. In addition, control for executing the long initial operation following the short initial operation can be performed.

  In the power-on command processing in this modified example, when it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is the power failure recovery designation command (step 72AKS002; Yes), the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020. Thereafter, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS033), control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS034), and the power-on command processing is terminated. If it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is a power failure restoration designation command, the contents stored in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 are restored to the contents at the time of the power failure with the start of power supply by turning on the power. . When such a power failure recovery is performed, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is performed, so that the control to execute the long initial operation as the initial operation following the short initial operation as the recovery operation is performed. it can. Also, even after executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS020, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed, so that the setting confirmation for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. After the end of the state, control for executing a long initial operation as an initial operation following a short initial operation as a return operation can be performed. As described above, when the received command is determined to be the power failure recovery notification command in step 72AKS002 and after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is performed in common. In addition, control for executing the long initial operation following the short initial operation can be performed.

  In the short initial operation and the long initial operation, control may be performed in response to the initialization notification, or control may be performed without the initialization notification. In addition, the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled to be performed when the power failure recovery notification is performed, or may be performed without performing the power failure recovery notification. Further, after the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed based on the establishment of the return operation condition. After the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed based on the establishment of the initial operation condition.

  The configuration of the movable member is not limited to a form including the first movable member and the second movable member, and at least a short initial operation as a return operation and a long initial operation as an initial operation can be performed, What is necessary is just to be able to operate in a predetermined operation mode in the effect accompanying the progress of the game. The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be those arbitrarily designated according to the configuration of the movable member.

As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 72AK, control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS007. In this way, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state in which the setting value change is permitted, the movable member such as the first movable member or the second movable member is moved to the origin position. Control is performed to execute a return operation for returning to. Accordingly, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the movable member is returned to the home position, so that the work for changing the set value is not hindered by the movable member, and the work for changing the set value is performed. Can be prevented from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 72AK, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013 is performed, so that the short initial operation as a return operation is performed. Subsequently, control for executing a long initial operation as an initial operation is performed. On the other hand, when the short initial operation is executed by the control in step 72AKS007, the control for executing the long initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is finished. If the long initial operation that is the initial operation is performed in the setting change state, the execution of the setting change notification is hindered, and there is a possibility that appropriate notification cannot be performed. Therefore, control for executing the long initial operation is performed after the setting change state ends, and control for executing the long initial operation is not performed when the setting is in the setting confirmation state. As described above, when the setting change state is set as the change permission state, the long initial operation, which is the initial operation by the movable member, is not performed, and the setting value change work is not hindered, so that the setting value can be prevented. It is possible to prevent troubles in changing the value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended, control is performed to execute a long initial operation in step 72AKS011. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, control is performed to execute only the long initial operation as the initial operation. Thus, when it is possible to prevent trouble in the operation of changing the set value, it is possible to prevent useless operation of the movable member and reduce a control load for operating the movable member. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  In the power-on command processing in the modified example of the characteristic unit 72AK, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed, thereby performing a return operation. Control is performed to execute a long initial operation, which is an initial operation, following the short initial operation. At this time, by performing the control in step 72AKS014, control for executing the initialization notification is performed. In this way, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) with the start of power supply by turning on the power, so that when the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the initialization notification is given. When this initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a short initial operation as a return operation and a long initial operation as an initial operation. Also, when it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed to execute the long initial operation as the initial operation following the short initial operation as the return operation. Perform control. Thereby, in order to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value, the operation of the movable member can be made common and the control load for operating the movable member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 72AK, in step AKS017, control for executing the short initial operation is performed. In this manner, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value, the movable members such as the first movable member and the second movable member are moved to the origin position. Control is performed to execute a return operation for returning to. Thereafter, if it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is to be ended, control is performed in step 72AKS021 to execute the long initial operation. In this way, control is performed to execute the long initial operation as the initial operation after the setting confirmation state ends. If the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is performed in the setting confirmation state, the execution of the setting confirmation notification is hindered, and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, control for executing the long initial operation is performed after the setting confirmation state ends, and control for executing the long initial operation is not performed when the setting confirmation state is established. Thereby, in order to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value, the set value can be easily checked by preventing the long initial operation, which is the initial operation by the movable member, from being performed when the setting is in the check state. To do. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic portion 72AK)
Regarding the above-described characteristic portion 72AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for a player is described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for returning a movable member to an origin position, for example, there is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-221154. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-22154, the case where the change of the setting and the operation of the movable member conflict is not considered. For this reason, there is a possibility that the operation of changing to a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player may be affected. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 72AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in the work of changing the set value,
A gaming machine (eg, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that performs a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
A setting control means (for example, CPU 103 executing the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting a change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member operable in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK014, and the like);
At least a movable control means (for example, a step) capable of controlling a return operation (for example, a short initial operation or the like) for returning the movable member to the origin position and an initial operation (for example, a long initial operation) by the movable member. Effect control CPU 120 for executing command processing at power-on of AKS012).
The movable control unit performs control to execute the return operation when the change is permitted (for example, execution of step 72AKS007).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position is performed in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent a trouble in changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
The movable control means,
When the control is not controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013),
When the change is permitted, the control for executing the initial operation following the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS008).
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 72AK may be used.
In such a configuration, the initial operation by the movable member is not executed in the change permission state, so that it is possible to prevent the trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
The movable control means performs control to execute only the initial operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 72AKS011).
It may be a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, useless operation by the movable member can be prevented, and at the same time, trouble in changing the set value can be prevented.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
When the gaming machine is initialized with the start of power supply, initialization notifying means for executing initialization notification (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 72AKS014). Etc.)
The movable control means,
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031, 72AKS032 accompanying execution of step 72AKS014),
After the end of the change permission state, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031, 72AKS032 following steps 72AKS005 to 72AKS010),
It may be a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load by sharing the operation of the movable member, and to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
A setting confirmation control unit (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting confirmation process in step AKS002) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state for confirming a setting value set by the setting unit;
The movable control means,
In the setting confirmation state, control for executing the return operation is performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS017),
After the setting confirmation state ends, control for executing the initial operation is performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS021).
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, the initial operation by the movable member is not performed in the setting confirmation state, so that the set value can be easily confirmed and the trouble of changing the set value can be prevented.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 73AK)
FIG. 8-45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characteristic unit 73AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command processing only needs to be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the above embodiment. Regarding the characteristic portion 73AK, the operation content of the short initial operation or the long initial operation may be the same as the characteristic portion 72AK of the present embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the command received from the main board 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 73AKS001 to 73AK).
S004). If it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is a setting change start command (step 73AKS003; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step 73AKS005), similarly to the above embodiment. Control for starting notification is performed (step 73AKS006).

  After performing the control in step 73AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 73AKS007). If the setting change is not to be ended (step 73AKS007; No), step 73AKS007 is repeatedly executed to wait. If it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended (step 73AKS007; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step 73AKS008), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 73AKS009). As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, the control for executing the short initial operation as the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position is not performed when the setting change state is set as the change permission state. .

  If it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 73AKS001; Yes), or after executing the game stop state end processing in step 73AKS009, control to execute the short initial operation is performed. (Step 73AKS010), and control for executing the long initial operation is performed (Step 73AKS011). In step 73AKS011, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS010 is completed. By performing the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011, when the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of power supply, the long initial operation as the initial operation follows the short initial operation as the return operation. Can be controlled. In addition, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled along with the start of the power supply, it is possible to perform control to execute the short initial operation as the return operation after the setting change state ends. Alternatively, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled along with the start of power supply, after the setting change state ends, the short initial operation as a return operation is followed by the long initial operation as an initial operation. Control for executing the operation can be performed.

  Thereafter, control for executing the initialization notification is performed (step 73AKS012). The control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for executing the short initial operation or the long initial operation may be performed. Alternatively, after performing control to execute the short initial operation, control to execute initialization notification may be performed, and then control to execute the long initial operation may be performed.

  When it is determined in step 73AKS004 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command (step 73AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 73AKS013), as in the above-described embodiment. Control for starting notification is performed (step 73AKS014). Subsequently, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 73AKS015). By executing the control in step 73AKS015, the control for executing the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position is in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It can be performed. Note that, even in a period after the process proceeds to step 73AKS016 or later, the control in step 73AKS015 may be continuously performed until the short initial operation period ends, and control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

Subsequent to the control in Step 73AKS015, it is determined whether or not to end the setting confirmation (Step 73AKS016). If the setting confirmation is not completed (step 73AKS0
16; No), repeatedly execute step 73AKS016 and wait. If it is determined in step 73AKS016 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step 73AKS016; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 73AKS017), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 73AKS018). Next, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 73AKS019), and the power-on command processing ends. By executing the control in step 73AKS019, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed, the long initial operation as the initial operation of the movable member is executed. Control can be performed. In addition, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS019, the long initial operation as the initial operation follows the short initial operation as the return operation in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value. Is not performed. Note that even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 73AKS019 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 73AKS002 that the received command is a power failure restoration designation command (step 73AKS002; Yes), control to execute a short initial operation is performed (step 73AKS020), and then control to execute a long initial operation. (Step 73AKS021), the power-on command processing ends. In step 73AKS021, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS020 is completed. By executing the control in steps 73AKS020 and 73AKS021, when the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of power supply, the long initial operation is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. Control for executing the operation can be performed. Note that, even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 73AKS021 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. The control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by a common process using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02, as in the case of the characteristic portion 72AK. Alternatively, the control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02, as in the case of the characteristic portion 72AK.

  FIG. 8-46 shows the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 displayed during the execution of the setting confirmation notification for the characteristic portion 73AK. On the setting confirmation notifying screen 73AKD01, a character image for notifying a message of "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed, and a history of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. The history of the setting values may be cumulatively stored on the effect control board 12 side by storing the set value information together with the RTC information in a backup area of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12, for example. Alternatively, the set value history is stored in a predetermined area along with the RTC information in a non-volatile storage device (for example, a flash memory) provided separately from the RAM 122 so that the effect control board 12 It may be stored cumulatively on the side. Alternatively, the setting value history is stored in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 in the backup area together with the setting value information in the backup area, and the setting confirmation start command is transmitted. By transmitting a set value history command prepared in advance as an effect control command capable of specifying a history of set values from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the effect control board 12 side May be specified at the start of the process.

  When the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 is displayed, if the movable member is stopped at a position deviating from the origin position, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display screen of the effect display device 5 and grasp the history of the set values. It becomes difficult to do. Therefore, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, the control in step 73AKS015 is executed, so that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, Control is performed to execute a short initial operation as a return operation for returning the member to the home position. As described above, when the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation state in response to the start of the power supply, unlike the case of being controlled to the setting change state, the short initial operation, which is the return operation, is performed. The history of the set values that can be displayed on the 73AKD01 can be easily grasped by the staff at the game hall or the like. On the other hand, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS018, the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 In this case, the control for executing the long initial operation as the initial operation following the short initial operation as the return operation is not performed. As described above, in the case where control is performed to the setting confirmation state along with the start of power supply, in this setting confirmation state, the short initial operation as the return operation is performed, while the long initial operation as the initial operation is performed. Since the operation is not performed, the long initial operation is performed after the staff of the game hall or the like can easily grasp the history of the set values that can be displayed on the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01. In this case, it is possible to prevent the history of the set values from becoming difficult to grasp due to the movable member.

  It should be noted that the history of the set values may be displayed even when the setting is changed to the changed state. In this case, control may be performed to execute a short initial operation for returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting change state is set as the change permission state. As described above, when the history of the set value can be displayed by being controlled to the setting confirmation state with the start of the power supply, the short initial operation as the return operation is performed, and the set value is set. May be easily grasped.

  As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, if it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, control is performed to execute the short initial operation in step 73AKS010. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is the setting change start command, the control for executing the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended. Accordingly, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the short initial operation, which is the return operation for returning the movable member to the home position, is not performed, so that the change operation of the set value is not hindered by the return operation. In this way, it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, after it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended, the control in step 73AKS010 is performed, so that the control to execute the short initial operation as the return operation is performed. As described above, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, the control for executing the short initial operation as the return operation is performed. An operation of appropriately returning the member to the origin position can be performed.

In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, if it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed, and the short initial operation as a return operation is performed. Subsequently, control for executing a long initial operation as an initial operation is performed. At this time, the control for executing the initialization notification is performed by performing the control in step 73AKS012. In this way, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) with the start of power supply by turning on the power, so that when the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the initialization notification is given. When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a short initial operation as a return operation and a long initial operation as an initial operation following the short initial operation as a return operation. Also, when it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed, so that the long initial operation as the initial operation is performed following the short initial operation as the return operation. Perform control. Thereby, in order to prevent a trouble in the operation of changing the set value, the operation of the movable member can be shared, and the control load for operating the movable member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, the history of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, if it is determined in step 73AK004 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command, control is performed in step 73AKS015 to execute a short initial operation. Thus, when the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 which is the setting confirmation display capable of displaying the history of the setting values is being displayed, the control for executing the short initial operation as the returning operation is performed. This makes it possible to easily grasp the setting confirmation display in order to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  The effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, when the command 9100H serving as the setting change start command is received in step 73AKS003, it is determined that the received command is the setting change start command. The command 9100H serving as a setting change start command transmitted from the main board 11 is different from the command 9000H serving as a RAM clear notification command, the command 9200H serving as a power failure recovery designation command, and the command 9400H serving as a setting check start command. In this manner, when the power supply is started and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state in which the setting value change is permitted in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a command as information different from the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not controlled to the setting change state is transmitted. Is done. Thereby, in order to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value, it is possible to reduce the control load regarding the effect. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic portion 73AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristic portion 73AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for a player is described in, for example, JP-A-2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for returning a movable member to an origin position, for example, there is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-221154. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-22154, the case where the change of the setting and the operation of the movable member conflict is not considered. For this reason, there is a possibility that the operation of changing to a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player may be affected. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 73AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in an operation of changing a set value,
A gaming machine (eg, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that performs a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with the game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value.
etc,
A setting control means (for example, CPU 103 executing the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting a change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member operable in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK014, and the like);
At least movable control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing a power-on command process in step AKS012) capable of controlling a return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position,
The movable control means,
When the control is not controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control for executing the return operation is performed (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
When the change is permitted, the control for executing the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position is not performed in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK,
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
It may be a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately operate the movable member and to prevent trouble in the operation of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK,
When the gaming machine is initialized along with the start of power supply, initialization notification means for executing initialization notification (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 73AKS012). Etc.)
The movable control means,
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute an initial operation by the movable member following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS010 to 73AKS012),
After the end of the change permission state, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010 following steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009),
The game machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 73AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load by sharing the operation of the movable member, and to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK,
Setting display means (for example, effect display device 5 or the like) capable of executing a setting confirmation display for confirming the set value set by the setting means,
The setting display means can display a history of the set values set by the setting means in the setting confirmation display (for example, display of a setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01).
The movable control means controls the execution of the return operation when the setting confirmation display is being executed, and does not perform the control of executing the initial operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS015 and 73AKS016).
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK.
In such a configuration, when the setting confirmation display is being performed, the initial operation by the movable member is not performed, so that the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped, and there is a problem in changing the setting value. Can be prevented.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK,
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing a command analysis process of AKS015) for controlling the execution of the effect based on information from the game control means,
The game control means transmits information (for example, a command 9100H serving as a setting change start command) that is different from the case where the change is not controlled in the change permission state when the change permission state is controlled in response to the start of power supply. ,
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK.
With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the effect control means and prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 74AK)
FIG. 8-47 shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used for executing the confirmation effect, regarding the characteristic portion 74AK of the present embodiment. The pattern data constituting the effect control pattern 74AKP01 may be stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 in advance. The confirmation effect is controlled to be executable based on the establishment of a predetermined confirmation effect condition after the power supply is started by turning on the power. The confirmation effect of the characteristic unit 74AK includes the output of the confirmation sound for outputting the sound of the trumpet twice from the left speaker 8L, the output of the confirmation sound for outputting the sound of the drum twice from the right speaker 8R, and the output of the stick controller 31A. Confirmation vibration that drives two sets of vibration motors built in the operation rod (lever) in a predetermined pattern is included. The effect control pattern 74AKP01 includes data indicating the confirmation effect process timer initial value 74AKJ00, and enables, for example, the initial value of the check effect process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 to be set. Also, in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ01, the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ02, the confirmation The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 associated with the effect process timer determination value 74AKJ03 is included. The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 is used for controlling the output of a confirmation sound for outputting the sound of the trumpet twice from the left speaker 8L. The second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 is used to control the output of a confirmation sound for outputting the drum sound twice from the right speaker 8R. The third confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 is used to control confirmation vibration for driving two sets of vibration motors built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in a predetermined pattern. When controlling the execution of the confirmation effect, the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer is updated, and when any one of the confirmation effect process timer judgment values 74AKJ01 to 74AKJ03 is matched, the first to third confirmations corresponding to the matched judgment values are performed. By performing the control using the effect control data 74AKD03, the output of the confirmation sound and the confirmation vibration can be executed.

During the execution of the confirmation effect, a part or all of the light emitting members included in the game effect lamp 9 may be turned on. For example, when the confirmation effect is started, the lighting of the light emitting member is started, and the output of the confirmation sound is started from the left speaker 8L. When the output of the confirmation sound by the left speaker 8L ends, the output of the confirmation sound from the right speaker 8R starts. When the output of the confirmation sound by the right speaker 8R ends, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A starts. Then, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A ends, the light emitting member is turned off, and the confirmation effect ends. In the confirmation effect, after the power supply is started by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected within a predetermined confirmation reception period, so that the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. Then, execution is started. Production of any one of output of a confirmation sound by the left speaker 8L, output of a confirmation sound by the right speaker 8R, and confirmation vibration by a vibration motor built in an operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A. Is performed, the control for executing another effect is not performed. As described above, when any one of the output of the confirmation sound and the confirmation vibration included in the confirmation effect is performed, the control may be performed so as not to execute another effect. Since the output of the confirmation sound and the confirmation vibration are executed at different timings in this way, it is easy for the staff in the game hall or the like to easily determine whether or not the effect using each of the effect devices can be normally executed. Can be.

  FIGS. 8 to 48 are flowcharts illustrating an example of an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 for the characteristic unit 74AK. This effect control main processing may be executed in place of the effect control main processing in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 74AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization process (step 74AKS011) and the power-on command process (step 74AKS012) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and then turns the timer interrupt flag on. Is determined (step 74AKS013), and if it is off (step 74AKS013; No), step 74AKS013 is repeatedly executed to stand by. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on (step 74AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step 74AKS014), command analysis processing (step 74AKS015), and effect control process processing (Step 74AKS016), and the effect random number updating process (Step 74AKS017) are sequentially executed. Further, in the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 74AK, the confirmation effect control process (step 74AKS018) is executed, and then the process returns to step 74AKS013.

  FIG. 8-49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process performed in step 74AKS018 as the confirmation effect control process. In the confirmation effect control process, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization notification has been started (step 74AKS031). For example, in the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, the initialization notification is started by performing the control in step AKS030. Thereafter, when the determination in step 74AKS031 is first performed, it may be determined that the initialization notification has started. An initialization notification start flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and when the initialization notification start flag is on, it may be determined that the initialization notification has started.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the start of the initialization notification has been started (step 74AKS031; Yes), control for starting the confirmation reception period is performed (step 74AKS032). The confirmation reception period may be started when the initialization notification is started, and may be ended when a predetermined confirmation reception time such as 30 seconds or 1 minute elapses.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification has not been started (step 74AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not a confirmation reception period has been reached (step 74AKS033). When the confirmation reception period is started in step 74AKS032 or when it is determined in step 74AKS033 that it is the confirmation reception period (step 74AKS033; Yes), it is determined whether the variable display is started (step 74AKS033; Yes). 74AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the variable display has been started by receiving the first change start command and the second change start command transmitted from the main board 11.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display is to be started (step 74AKS034; Yes), control for canceling the confirmation reception period is performed (step 74AKS035), and the confirmation effect control process ends. As described above, when the variable display is started during the confirmation reception period, the confirmation reception period is stopped, and the restriction is made so that the confirmation effect condition is not satisfied. By canceling the confirmation reception period along with the start of the variable display, it is possible to control the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect so that the confirmation effect is appropriately executed.

  If it is determined in Step 74AKS034 that the variable display has not been started (Step 74AKS034; No), it is determined whether or not an operation for starting the confirmation effect has been detected (Step 74AKS036). In step 74AKS036, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected, it may be determined that the operation for starting the confirmation effect has been detected. At this time, if there is no motion detection (step 74AKS036; No), the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the motion has been detected (step 74AKS036; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used for executing the confirmation effect is read from a predetermined area of the ROM 121 (step 74AKS037), and the confirmation effect process is performed. The timer initial value 74AKJ00 is set as the confirmation effect process timer (step 74AKS038). Also, the timer value is set so as to be determined based on the first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 (step 74AKS039), and the process proceeds to step 74AKS046. If it is determined in step 74AKS036 that an operation has been detected and a setting for executing a confirmation effect is performed, control for ending the confirmation reception period may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS033 that it is not the confirmation reception period (step 74AKS033; No), it is determined whether or not a confirmation effect is being performed (step 74AKS040). In step 74AKS040, for example, when measurement of the elapsed time by the confirmation effect process timer has started, it may be determined that the confirmation effect is being performed. At this time, if the confirmation effect is not being performed (step 74AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the confirmation effect is being performed (step 74AKS040; Yes), it is determined whether the variable display has been started (step 74AKS041). Then, when it is determined that the variable display is to be started (step 74AKS041; Yes), control for stopping the confirmation effect is performed (step 74AKS042), and the confirmation effect control process ends. In this way, when the variable display is started during the confirmation effect, the execution of the confirmation effect is stopped by stopping the execution of the confirmation effect so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect do not overlap. , The confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS041 that the variable display has not been started (step 74AKS041; No), update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 74AKS043). Next, it is determined whether or not a timeout of the confirmation effect process timer has occurred (step 74AKS044). At this time, if a timeout has occurred (step 74AKS044; Yes), control is performed to end the confirmation effect (step 74AKS045), and the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timeout has not occurred (step 74AKS044; No), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 74AKS046). If it does not match the determination value (step 74AKS046; No), the confirmation effect control process ends.

When it is determined in step 74AKS046 that the value matches the determination value (step 74AKS046; Yes), an effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 74AKS047). In addition, after setting such that the timer value is determined based on the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 74AKS048), the confirmation effect control process ends.

  FIG. 8-50 is a timing chart showing a control example of the confirmation effect regarding the characteristic portion 74AK. FIG. 8-50 (A) shows that the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected when the power supply is started by turning on the power, but the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is not detected. Correspondingly, a case where the setting is not controlled to the change state is shown. FIG. 8-50 (B) shows that when power supply is started by turning on the power, an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected and an operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is detected. Corresponds to the case where the state is controlled to the setting change state. FIG. 8C illustrates the control content at each timing.

  In a case where the power supply is not turned on at the timing 74AKT01 and the setting is not controlled, the effect control board 12 determines that, for example, the effect control CPU 120 has received the RAM clear notification command at the timing 74AKT02. . In the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, the control in step AKS030 is performed and the initialization notification is started when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command. Then, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 74AK, it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification is to be started, and the confirmation reception period is started by the control of step 74AKS032. You. If an operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 74AKT03 within the confirmation detection period, it is determined that the confirmation effect start operation has been detected at step 74AKS036 of the confirmation effect control process, and the confirmation effect control process is performed. The control for executing the confirmation effect, such as steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048, is started. By starting the control for executing the confirmation effect in this manner, a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects are provided using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. The effects are executed in order. Thereafter, at timing 74AKT04, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the control in step 74AKS045 is performed, thereby ending the confirmation effect.

  On the other hand, when the control is changed to the setting change state with the start of power supply by turning on the power at the timing 74AKT11, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 issues a setting change start command at the timing 74AKT12. It is determined that it has been received. In the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, since the received command is determined to be the setting change start command in step AKS023, the game stop state start processing in step AKS025 is executed, and then the control in step AKS026 is performed. Is performed, and the setting change notification is started. At this time, except for receiving the setting change end command, control for continuously executing the setting change notification is performed, and control for executing the initialization notification is not started. Thereafter, when the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at the timing 74AKT13, it is determined that the setting change is ended in step AKS027 of the power-on command processing, and the steps AKS028 and AKS029 are subsequently executed. , The control of step AKS030 is performed, and the initialization notification is started.

In this way, when the initialization notification by the control of step AKS030 is started at timing 74AKT13, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 74AK, the initialization notification is performed in step 74AKS031. Is started, and the control in step 74AKS032 starts the confirmation reception period. Therefore, at timing 74AKT13, the confirmation reception period starts with the start of the initialization notification. When an operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 74AKT14 during the confirmation reception period, the step 74AKS03 of the confirmation effect control process is performed.
In 6, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect has been detected, and the control for executing the confirmation effect, such as steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048 of the confirmation effect control process, is started. When the control for executing the confirmation effect is started in this way, a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects are provided using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. The effects are executed in order. Thereafter, at timing 74AKT15, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the control in step 74AKS045 is performed, thereby ending the confirmation effect.

  The effect included in the confirmation effect may be an effect using any effect device provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in addition to or instead of the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A, the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the push button 31B. May be executed.

  As described above, in the effect control main processing of the characteristic unit 74AK, the power-on command processing is executed in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment in step 74AKS012, and then the confirmation effect control processing is executed in step 74AKS018. In the power-on command processing, for example, a game stop state start processing is executed in step AKS025 or step AKS031. After the game stop state start process is executed, the reception of a command different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and regulation is performed so that control relating to normal effects is not executed. In this case, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, in step AKS030, control for executing the initialization notification is performed. Thereafter, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018, when the confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on, for example, the determination of the start of the initialization notification in step 74AKS031, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 and thereafter to execute the confirmation effect. Perform the control to be executed. In this way, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state in which the setting value change is permitted, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed. Thereby, the control for changing the set value is given priority over the control for executing the confirmation effect, so that it is possible to prevent the trouble in the work for changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  In the power-on command processing, control in steps AKS025 to AKS030 is performed in accordance with the setting change state. Thereafter, by executing the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, the control for executing the confirmation effect in accordance with the establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the setting change state as the change permission state ends. Do. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect when preventing a trouble in the work of changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by a player. In the confirmation effect control process of the characteristic unit 74AK, the control in step 74AKS032 is executed, so that the confirmation accepting period is reached, and thereafter, it is determined in step 74AKS036 that the start operation has been detected, so that the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. . This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect when preventing a trouble in the work of changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

When the confirmation effect control process is performed in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 74AK, the control in step 74AKS032 is executed, so that the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) without being controlled to the setting confirmation state. ), The confirmation acceptance period is the same as the case where the setting confirmation state ends. The control for executing the confirmation effect is performed in accordance with the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period. Thereby, in order to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value, the control regarding the execution of the confirmation effect can be shared, and the control load of the confirmation effect can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  The effect control pattern 74AKP01 used in the characteristic portion 74AK includes the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02, thereby enabling control to output a confirmation sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Thus, the confirmation effect includes the output of the confirmation sound by the speakers 8L and 8R serving as the sound output means. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect when preventing a trouble in the work of changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic part 74AK)
Regarding the above-described characteristic portion 74AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for a player is described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for performing control for outputting a confirmation sound, for example, there is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-220833, no consideration has been given to a case where a change in setting and a performance for confirmation conflict. For this reason, there is a possibility that the operation of changing to a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player may be affected. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 74AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in a setting value changing operation,
A gaming machine (eg, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that performs a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
A setting control means (for example, CPU 103 executing the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting a change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Effect means (eg, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of executing effects,
After the power supply is started, a confirmation control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing a confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018) capable of executing a confirmation effect control by the effect means based on establishment of a confirmation effect condition; With
The confirmation control means,
When the control is not controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after execution of steps AKS021, AKS030, etc. ),
When the change permission state is set, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed (for example, execution of steps AKS025 to AKS029).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, the confirmation effect is not executed when the change is permitted, so that it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
The confirmation control means performs control for executing the confirmation effect in accordance with establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after execution of steps AKS025 to AKS030, etc.) ),
A gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 74AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent a trouble in the operation of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
Game detecting means (for example, a push button 31B, a push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting an action by the player;
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the game detection means during the confirmation reception period (for example, execution of step 74AKS036).
The game machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 74AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent a trouble in the operation of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
The confirmation control means, when initialization is performed without being controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, when the change permission state ends, the confirmation effect condition in a common confirmation reception period Control for executing the confirmation effect is performed in accordance with the establishment (for example, execution of steps 74AKS033 and 74AKS036),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK.
In such a configuration, the execution of the confirmation effect is made common, and it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting a production sound,
The confirmation effect includes an output of a sound for confirmation by the sound output unit (for example, execution of step 74AKS047 using the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent a trouble in the operation of changing the set value.

(Explanation about 75AK)
FIG. 8-51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characteristic portion 75AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command processing only needs to be executed in step 74AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the characteristic part 74AK of the above embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines a command received from the main board 11 as in the above-described embodiment (steps 75AKS001 to 75AKS004). If it is determined in step 75AK003 that the received command is a setting change start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step 75AKS005), as in the above-described embodiment. Control for starting notification is performed (step 75AKS006).

After performing the control in step 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 75AKS007). If the setting change is not to be ended (step 75AKS007; No), unlike the above-described embodiment, a setting change confirmation effect control process is executed (step 75AKS008), and the process returns to step 75AKS007. As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, the setting change confirmation state is controlled as the change permission state with the start of power supply by executing the setting change confirmation effect control processing in step 75AKS008. Then, control for executing the confirmation effect can be performed. If it is determined in step 75AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended (step 75AKS007; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step 75AKS009), and a game stop state end process is executed (step 75AKS010).

  If it is determined in step 75AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 75AKS001; Yes), or after executing the game stop state end processing in step 75AKS010, control to execute initialization notification is performed. (Step 75AKS011), and the power-on command processing ends.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS003 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), a process corresponding to the setting confirmation state is executed as in the above embodiment (steps 75AKS012 to 75AKS016). ), The power-on command processing ends. As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, when the setting is changed to the setting change state in response to the start of the power supply, the setting change confirmation effect control processing of step 75AKS008 is executed, while the setting change state is set. When it is controlled, the process corresponding to the setting change confirmation effect control process is not executed. Therefore, while the control for enabling the confirmation effect is performed when the setting is in the setting change state, the control for enabling the confirmation effect to be executed when the setting is in the confirmation state is not performed.

  FIG. 8-52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step 75AKS008 as a setting effect confirmation effect presentation control process. In the confirmation effect control process during setting confirmation, effect control CPU 120 first determines whether a confirmation effect has been completed (step 75AKS031). In step 75AKS031, for example, when the confirmation effect completion flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is ON, it may be determined that the confirmation effect has been completed. The confirmation effect completion flag may be set to the ON state when the execution of the confirmation effect is completed. If the confirmation effect has been completed in step 75AKS031 (step 75AKS031; Yes), the setting effect confirming effect control process ends.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS031 that the confirmation effect has not been completed (step 75AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect is being performed (step 75AKS032). At this time, if the confirmation effect is not being performed (step 75AKS032; No), it is determined whether or not an operation for starting the confirmation effect has been detected (step 75AKS033). If there is no motion detection in step 75AKS033 (step 75AKS033; No), the in-setting-change confirmation effect control process ends. If it is determined in step 75AKS033 that an operation has been detected (step 75AKS033; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 is read as a setting for starting execution of the confirmation effect (step 75AKS034), and the confirmation effect process timer is initialized. A value 74AKJ00 is set (step 75AKS035), and an initial confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 is set (step 75AKS036). As described above, in the setting change confirmation effect control process, the determination in step 75AKS033 is performed. Therefore, when the setting change state is set as the change permission state, an arbitrary period such as the confirmation reception period is not provided. When the operation of pressing the push button 31B at the timing is detected, the confirmation effect condition is satisfied, and the execution of the confirmation effect can be started.

If it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is being performed (step 75AKS032; Yes), the update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 75AKS037), and it is determined whether a timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038). ). At this time, if a timeout has occurred (Step 75AKS038; Yes), control is performed to end the confirmation effect (Step 75AKS039), and the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timeout has not occurred (Step 75AKS038; No), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (Step 75AKS040). If it does not match the determination value (step 75AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process ends.

  When it is determined in step 75AKS040 that it matches the determination value (step 75AKS040; Yes), an effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 75AKS041). In addition, after setting such that the timer value is determined based on the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 75AKS042), the confirmation effect control process ends.

  FIG. 8-53 is a timing chart showing a control example of the confirmation effect regarding the characteristic portion 75AK. FIG. 8-53 (A) shows that when the power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, but the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is not detected. Correspondingly, a case where the setting is not controlled to the change state is shown. FIG. 8-53 (B) shows that when power supply is started by turning on the power, an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, and an operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is detected. Corresponds to the case where the state is controlled to the setting change state. FIG. 8-53 (C) shows the control content at each timing.

  When the power is not turned on in the setting change state with the start of power supply at the timing 75AKT01, it is the same as the case in which the setting is not controlled in the characteristic unit 74AK, and the RAM clear notification command is received at the timing 74AKT02. Accordingly, the initialization notification is started, and accordingly, the confirmation reception period is started. When the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected at the timing 75AKT03 in the confirmation reception period, control for executing the confirmation effect is started, and the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 and the like. , A plurality of types of effects, which are first to third confirmation effects, are sequentially executed. Thereafter, at timing 75AKT04, the confirmation effect ends.

  On the other hand, when the power is turned on at the timing 75AKT11 to start the power supply, the setting is controlled at the timing 75AKT12, unlike the case where the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation state at the timing 75AKT12. Upon receiving the start command, it is determined in step 75AKS003 of the power-on command processing that the received command is a setting change start command. As a result, following steps 75AKS005 and 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not the setting change is to be terminated in step 75AKS007. If the setting is not to be terminated at this time, a confirmation effect control processing during setting change is executed in step 75AKS008. You. In the confirmation effect control process during the setting change of the characteristic portion 75AK, when it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is not being performed, it is determined in step 75AKS033 whether or not a start operation has been detected. In this manner, when the setting change state is set as the change permission state, the confirmation effect condition can be satisfied by detecting the operation of pressing the push button 31B. For example, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 75AKT13 in the setting change state, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect has been detected in step 75AKS033 of the confirmation effect control process during setting change. Then, the control for executing the confirmation effect such as steps 75AKS034-75AKS042 of the setting effect confirmation effect control process is started. In this way, using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, a plurality of types of effects serving as the first to third confirmation effects are sequentially executed. Thereafter, at timing 75AKT14, the confirmation effect ends.

  After the timing 75AKT14, when the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at the timing 75AKT15, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, it is determined that the setting change is ended in step 75AKS007. Thus, following steps 75AKS009 and 75AKS010, control of step 75AKS011 is performed, and initialization notification is started. When the initialization notification is started, similarly to the case of the characteristic portion 74AK, the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, so that the confirmation reception period is controlled. Just fine. Then, when the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in the confirmation reception period, the control for executing the confirmation effect may be started again.

  As described above, the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK includes the setting change confirmation effect control process executed in step 75AKS008, and the start operation is detected in step 75AKS033 of the setting change confirmation effect control process. When it is determined that there is the confirmation effect, the control proceeds to step 74AKS037 or later, and the control for executing the confirmation effect is performed. In this way, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state in which the change of the set value is permitted, the control for executing the confirmation effect based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition is performed. Therefore, when the setting change state is set as the change permission state, by enabling the confirmation effect, it is possible to accurately check the state of the gaming machine and prevent trouble in checking the state of the gaming machine. Can be prevented.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, when it is determined in step 75AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the confirmation effect control processing similar to that of the characteristic unit 74AK is executed, and the confirmation is accepted. The period starts. During the confirmation reception period, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. On the other hand, in the setting effect confirmation effect control process, when it is determined that the start operation has been detected in step 75AKS033 without providing a confirmation acceptance period, control for executing the confirmation effect is performed. As a result, the confirmation effect can be executed at any time when the setting change condition is set as the change permission condition, so in order to prevent trouble in checking the state of the gaming machine, the confirmation effect is performed together with the setting value change. Can be performed properly.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, the control in steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011 is performed in accordance with the setting change state. Thereafter, a confirmation effect control process similar to that of the characteristic unit 74AK is executed, so that a confirmation reception period is started. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, the control for executing the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period is performed, so that the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine occurs. In order to prevent such a situation, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

  The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by a player. For example, in the confirmation effect control process during the setting change of the characteristic portion 75AK, it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the start operation has been detected, so that the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. In addition, by executing the same confirmation effect control process as that of the characteristic part 74AK, it is determined in step 74AKS036 that the start operation has been detected, and the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect when preventing the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic portion 75AK)
Regarding the above-described characteristic portion 75AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for a player is described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for performing control for outputting a confirmation sound, for example,
There is one described in Japanese Patent No. 20833. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-220833, no consideration has been given to a case where a change in setting and a performance for confirmation conflict. Therefore, there is a possibility that the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 75AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in checking the state of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine (eg, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that performs a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
A setting control means (for example, CPU 103 executing the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting a change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Effect means (eg, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of executing effects,
After the power supply is started, the confirmation control means (for example, the confirmation effect control processing in step 74AKS018, the confirmation effect control during setting change in step 75AKS008) capable of executing the confirmation effect control by the effect means based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. Effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing).
The confirmation control means,
When the control is not controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period (for example, execution of the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018). ),
When the change is permitted, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of a setting effect confirmation effect control process during setting change in step 75AKS008).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, the confirmation effect can be executed when the change is permitted, so that it is possible to accurately confirm the state of the gaming machine and prevent a trouble in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine. .

As a gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 75AK,
The confirmation control means,
If the initialization is performed without being controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with the establishment of the confirmation effect condition during the confirmation reception period (for example, step 74AKS033). , Running 74AKS036),
When the change is permitted, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition without providing a confirmation reception period (for example, execution of step 75AKS033).
It may be a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 75AK.
In such a configuration, the confirmation effect is appropriately executed together with the change of the set value, so that it is possible to prevent a trouble in the operation of confirming the state of the gaming machine.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 75AK,
The confirmation control means performs control for executing the confirmation effect in accordance with establishment of the confirmation effect condition during a confirmation acceptance period after the change permission state ends (for example, a step after executing steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011). 74AKS018),
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 75AK,
Game detecting means (for example, a push button 31B, a push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting an action by a player,
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the game detecting means (for example, execution of step 75AKS033).
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.

(Explanation of means common to characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK)
As a gaming machine of the means A according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
Setting detecting means (for example, a lock switch 51) capable of detecting an operation related to setting;
Initialization detecting means (for example, a clear switch AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation related to initialization of the gaming machine;
Setting confirmation control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state based on the detection of the operation by the setting detecting means upon the start of power supply (for example, CPU 103 executing steps AKS001 and AKS002);
A change permission control unit capable of controlling the change to the change permission state based on the detection of the operation by the initialization detection unit upon the start of power supply (for example, the CPU 103 executing steps Sa6 and Sa13);
It may be a gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control the setting confirmation state and the change permission state, and to appropriately set the setting values.

As a gaming machine of the means B relating to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
Setting detecting means (for example, a lock switch 51) capable of detecting an operation related to setting;
Initialization detecting means (for example, a clear switch AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation related to initialization;
When an operation is not detected by the setting detection unit and an operation is detected by the initialization detection unit along with the start of power supply, the initialization notification is performed at the same time as the start of power supply, while the start of power supply is performed. Accordingly, when an operation is detected by the setting detection unit, the initialization notification unit executes the initialization notification after the operation is no longer detected (for example, for an effect control unit that executes a power-on command process in step AKS012). CPU 120).
It may be a gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the initialization notification and to appropriately set the set values.

As a gaming machine of the means C according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 29 or the like) capable of displaying information on a game value given based on a game medium entering a predetermined area;
The information display means can display a set value set by the setting means (for example, a display by the first display unit 29A).
It may be a gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately set the setting values without separately providing a configuration for displaying the setting values.

As a gaming machine of the means D relating to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
Effect detection means (for example, an output amount changeover switch 71AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation relating to the output amount of the effect;
A display control unit (for example, an effect control CPU 120 executing step AKS026) for displaying a display relating to the set value by the setting unit prior to a display relating to the output amount of the effect;
It may be a gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, the display relating to the set value is appropriately performed, and it is possible to prevent the trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means E relating to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK,
Effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect based on information from the game control means (eg, effect control CPU 120 for executing command analysis processing of AKS015);
The effect control means, when in the change permission state, information restriction means for restricting control based on information different from notification information for notifying the end of the change permission state (for example, effect control CPU 120 executing AKS027, etc. ) And
It may be a gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem and to appropriately set the set value.

(Explanation related to association of features)
Each configuration related to the feature units 71AK to 75AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to the other feature units. The features combined in this way or individual features not combined may be combined as appropriate with some or all of the components related to other features. For example, regarding the characteristic unit 71AK, the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that executes the start-time output switching process in step 71AKS013 of the effect control main process, and the short initial operation in step 72AK007 of the power-on command process regarding the characteristic unit 72AK. Regarding the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that performs the control to be executed, and regarding the characteristic portion 73AK, the effect control for executing the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined that the setting change is completed in step 73AKS007 of the power-on command processing. Regarding the configuration of the CPU 120 and the characteristic portion 74AK, the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 for executing the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process. Regarding the characteristic portion 75AK, in step 75AKS008 of the power-on command process. Configuration of the effect control CPU120 for executing a constant change in confirmation effect control process, some or all, or may be appropriately combined.

(Explanation on the characteristic parts 229F to 233F)
Next, the characteristic portions 229F to 233F of the present embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portions 229F to 233F of the present embodiment has a configuration in which a winning probability (a payout rate) of a big hit and a small hit changes according to a set value set at a game hall side at the time of power-on or the like. Have been. For example, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to the set value, the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed. The set value has three stages of 1 to 3, and the set value 1 has the highest payout rate, and the payout rate decreases as the value increases in the order of the set value 1, the set value 2, and the set value 3. In other words, when the set value 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of the set value 2 and the set value 3, the advantage gradually decreases. The set value may be provided in three or more stages. Further, the higher the number, the higher the advantage may be.

  For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 229F of the present embodiment, the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit and the small hit changes according to the set value set at the game hall when the power is turned on. As an example, the winning probability of the big hit is 1/99 for the set value 1, 1/150 for the set value 2, and 1/200 for the set value 3. The setting value 3 is a setting value for setting the lowest winning probability of a jackpot or the like among a plurality of types of setting values, and is called a low setting. The set value 1 and the set value 2 are set values in which a jackpot winning probability or the like higher than the set value 3 of the low setting is set, and is called a high setting (change setting). Note that the setting value 3 may be used as a normal setting that is basically used, and each of the setting value 1 and the setting value 2 may be used as a changed setting (high setting) changed from the normal setting.

  Regarding the characteristic parts 229F to 232F, the number of rounds is 15 as the type of the big hit game state executed when the display result of the variable display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 becomes the specific display result (big hit display result). An example including a 15 round jackpot (hereinafter referred to as a 15R jackpot) and a 5-round jackpot having five rounds (hereinafter referred to as a 5R jackpot) will be described. The 15R jackpot is a jackpot more advantageous to the player than the 5R jackpot because the number of rounds is larger than the 5R jackpot and a larger number of prize balls (outgoing balls) can be expected than the 5R jackpot. In the following description, “round” may be indicated by using the word “R”.

  The big hit game state is a game state controlled when the display result of the variable display of the special symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2) becomes the big hit display result (big hit symbol), and the game ball can win. An open state (a first state advantageous to the player) and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win or cannot win (including difficulty in winning) (a second state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state). By opening and closing the special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 as a variable winning means that can be changed to a predetermined number of times, for example, 15 rounds and 5 rounds, the player can open the special winning opening for a predetermined number of times. This is an advantageous state.

[Explanation of the characteristic part 229F]
Next, the characteristic portion 229F of the present embodiment will be described. In the characteristic portion 229F, of the first big hitting game state and the second big hitting game state which are advantageous states for the player, the first big hit game having a higher degree of advantage for the player due to a large number of rounds, for example. A description will be given of an effect control example in which a special effect can be executed in the state. As a special effect, for example, at the start of a predetermined game state, such as at the start of each round of the big hit game state, an effect of highlighting that the game state is the predetermined game state is executed.

  In the characteristic portion 229F, a plurality of movable members that move in front of the image display device 5 are provided as the movable body 32 that is driven and controlled by the effect control CPU 120 of FIG. More specifically, the movable role is an upper movable role that is provided above the image display device 5 and moves up and down in front of the image display device 5, and is provided below the image display device 5. A lower movable role that moves up and down in front of it, a left movable role that is provided to the left of the image display device 5 and moves left and right in front of the image display device 5, and a right portion of the image display device 5 There are provided four movable auditors, which are provided on the right side and move right and left in front of the image display device 5. These movable characters are driven and controlled by the effect control CPU 120. All of these movable members are provided in a state in which they are accommodated in a center decoration member surrounding the image display device 5 in a standby state, and are moved from the upper, lower, left, and right ends of the image display device 5 by a moving operation. It appears and disappears in front of the image display device 5.

FIG. 9-1 is an effect explanation diagram including a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing an example of an effect of the special effect according to the characteristic portion 229F. In FIG. 9A, (A) to (F) show an effect mode in a jackpot game state with a 15R jackpot, and (G) to (L) show an effect mode in a jackpot game state with a 5R jackpot. ing.

  The length of the interval period between rounds differs between the 15R jackpot and the 5R jackpot. In the interval period, in the special variable winning ball device 7 in the big hit gaming state, the big winning port is closed in a period from the end of the previous open state to the start of the next open state one time before. Period. For example, the interval period of the 15R jackpot is 3 seconds, the interval period of the 5R jackpot is 2 seconds, and the interval period of the 15R jackpot with a large number of rounds is set to be longer. The reason why the interval period is different depending on the type of the big hit is to suppress an excessive number of payouts of prize balls in a predetermined unit period. In other words, if the interval period is changed according to the type of the big hit, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being increased due to an excessively fast speed at which the player can obtain the prize ball in the big hit gaming state. .

  At the start of each round in the jackpot game state, as shown in the diagram of (G), (J), and (L), for example, as shown in the figure, “1R”, “2R”, and “5R” A round number image indicating a large number of rounds is displayed in a relatively small size at the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a predetermined series of images of a medium-sized jackpot effect are displayed. Then, in the 5R big hit, for example, as shown in (I) and (K), a predetermined series of big hit medium effect images are displayed in the interval period between rounds in the big hit gaming state.

  The effect in the big hit game state as executed in such a 5R big hit is a basic normal effect. On the other hand, in the effect in the big hit game state executed with the 15R big hit, a special effect is executed as described below.

  In the 15R big hit, a special effect is executed at the start of each round in the big hit gaming state, for example, as in (A), (D), and (F). As a special effect, a round number image indicating the number of rounds indicated by “1LUKY”, “2LUKY”, and “15LUKY” in the figure by a number and a character “LUCKKY” is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The special image 229F001, which is an image that is displayed in a larger size than the round number image at the time of the 5R big hit and displays an aura image that emits light in a predetermined shape around the round number image almost over the entire screen. Is performed.

  In each round of the 15R jackpot, a special image 229F001 as shown in (A) is displayed in a predetermined period at the start, and then the special image 229F001 is erased as shown in (B), and for example, "1LUKY". The round number image indicating the appropriate round number is displayed in a relatively small size at the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

  Further, in the 15R big hit, for example, as shown in (C) and (E), during the interval period between each round in the big hit gaming state, the movable hits are operated to set the above-mentioned set value of the big hit winning probability and the like. , An interval period setting suggestion effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect indicating which of the setting values 1 to 3 is set. The interval period between rounds is a period from the end of a predetermined game such as the end of a round in the big hit game state as an advantageous state for the player to the start of the next predetermined game such as the start of the next round, that is, This is the period during which the winning opening is closed between rounds.

  In addition, as an example of the special effect, an example accompanied by a round number image indicating the number of rounds has been described. .

In the interval period setting suggestion effect, a movable character selected from the four types of movable characters described above is used. (C) shows an example in which the upper movable auditorium 229F002 operates downward during the interval period between the 1R and 2R rounds. (E) shows an example in which the lower movable auditorium 229F003 moves upward during the interval period between other rounds.

  In the 15R jackpot, for example, as shown in (C) and (E), during the interval period between each round in the jackpot game state, a movable character selected from a plurality of types is displayed as an interval period setting suggesting effect. An effect of performing a moving operation in front of the display device 5 is performed.

  At the end of the interval period, the movable accessory that has operated in front of the image display device 5 is returned to the standby position. The timing at which the movable movable object 229F002 that has operated returns may be during the interval period.

  Movement of the movable role in the interval period setting suggestion direction includes the effect of “moving the upper movable role”, the effect of “moving the lower movable role”, and the direction of “moving the left movable role”. , An effect of “moving the right movable character” and an effect of “moving all the movable characters” can be selected. Depending on the set values (set values 1 to 3) such as the jackpot probability set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the type of the movable accessory that operates during the interval period between the rounds is selected. different. As described above, the selection ratio of the movable movable object to be operated is different depending on the set value (the set values 1 to 3) of the big hit probability and the like. This can be an operation suggesting a setting. Thereby, during the interval period between each round, the interval period setting suggestion indicates which setting value such as the jackpot probability is set from among the set values 1 to 3 depending on the type of movable movable object that operates. A performance is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, in the 15R jackpot, during the interval period between rounds in the jackpot gaming state, a movable character selected from a plurality of types is displayed on the image display device 5 as an interval period setting suggesting effect. Is performed in front of the player, so that the player can be prevented from feeling that the interval period between rounds set to be longer than that in the case of the 5R big hit is long.

  In addition, as an example in which the interval period setting suggestion effect is performed using the movable role, as described above, the selection ratio of the movable role to be operated among a plurality of types of the movable role is made different according to the set value. Although the effect which suggests a set value was shown by the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and as another example, the following interval period setting suggestive effect may be executed. For example, an effect indicating the set value may be made by changing the selection ratio of a plurality of types of operation modes (movement speed, movement pattern, deformation pattern, and the like) of each movable accessory according to the set value. . Further, in the case where the interval period setting suggestion effect is performed by using the movable role provided with the light-emitting body, the effect suggesting the setting value may be performed by changing a selection ratio of a plurality of types of light emission modes. . Also, when performing an interval period setting suggestion effect using a movable character having an image display device, an effect suggesting a setting value is performed by changing a selection ratio of a display mode of a plurality of types of images. You may. Further, various effects using these movable auditors may be appropriately combined and executed.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram showing, in a table format, an interval period setting suggestion effect determination table used to select the effect type of the setting suggestion effect to be executed in the interval period between rounds in the big hit game state of the 15R jackpot. is there. The interval period setting suggestion effect determination table is stored in the ROM 121.

In FIG. 9B, the correspondence between the effect type (the type of movable character) of the setting suggestion effect executed as the interval period setting suggestion effect and the allocation of the random number for the interval period setting suggestion effect selection (displayed in%) is shown. , Set value 1, set value 2, and set value 3. Interval period setting suggestion effect selection random number is a random number for effect selection updated by effect control CPU 120. As shown in FIG. 9B, the operation types of the movable auditorium to be operated in the interval period setting suggestion effect are “movement of the upper movable auditorium”, “movement of the lower movable auditorium”, “movement of the left movable auditorium”. "," Movement of right movable auditorium ", and" movement of all movable auditoriums ".

  As shown in FIG. 9B, the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect of “moving the upper movable object” is selected is 90% or more for each of the set value 1, the set value 2, and the set value 3. Basically, a setting suggestion effect of “moving the upper movable object” is selected at an extremely high rate. As shown in FIG. 9B, the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect of “moving the upper movable auditorium” is selected has a relationship of “set value 1 <set value 2 <set value 3”. As a result, when the setting suggestion effect of “moving the upper movable role” is executed, the ratio of the setting value 3 is the highest.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect of “moving the movable auditory other than the setting suggestion effect of“ moving the upper movable object ”” is selected is set value 1, set value 2, And each of the setting values 3 is 10% or less. The ratio at which the setting suggestion effect of “moving the lower movable role” is selected has a relationship of “set value 1 <set value 2 <set value 3”. As a result, when the setting suggestion effect of “moving the lower movable object” is executed, the ratio of the setting value 3 is the highest.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect of “moving the left movable auditorium” is selected has a relationship of “setting value 3 <setting value 1 <setting value 2”. As a result, when the setting suggestive effect of “moving the left movable role” is performed, the ratio of the setting value 2 is the highest. As shown in FIG. 9B, the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect of “moving the right movable auditorium” is selected has a relationship of “setting value 3 <setting value 2 <setting value 1”. Thus, when the setting suggestion effect of “moving the right movable role” is performed, the ratio of the set value 1 is the highest. As shown in FIG. 9B, the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect of “moving all movable auditoriums” is selected has a relationship of “set value 2, 3 <set value 1”. In the case of 3, it is 0%. Thus, when the setting suggestion effect of “moving all movable objects” is performed, it is determined that the setting value is 1.

  And according to FIG. 9-2, the setting suggestion effect of “moving the lower movable character” and the setting of “moving the left movable character” other than the setting suggestion effect of “moving the upper movable character” For each of the suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect of “moving the right movable object”, and the setting suggestion effect of “moving all movable characters”, the setting value is set higher than the low setting value 3. The ratio of setting value 1 or setting value 2 is high. In this way, the setting suggestion effect of “moving the lower movable role” other than the setting suggestion effect of “moving the upper movable role”, the setting suggestion effect of “moving the left movable role”, and the “right movable role” When a setting suggestion effect of “moving an object” and a setting suggestion effect of “moving of all movable characters” are performed, the degree of expectation that the setting is higher than the low setting is higher.

  When the movable role is selected using the interval period setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 9B, basically, the setting suggestion effect of “moving the upper movable role” is selected at a high frequency and the movable position is operated. A setting suggestion effect that is displayed as a character and performs “Move the lower movable character” at a lower frequency than a setting suggestion effect that performs “Move the upper movable character”, and a setting suggestion that performs “Move the left movable character” One of an effect, a setting suggestion effect of “moving the right movable character”, and a setting suggestion effect of “moving all movable characters” is selected.

Regarding the setting suggestion effect by moving the movable character set in the interval period setting suggestion effect table in FIG. 9B, any of the upper, lower, left, and right movable characters (including the operation of all the movable characters). It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the player operates.However, in order to make the player pay more attention to the setting suggestion effect by the movable character, for example, for a plurality of types of motion patterns by the movable character, For example, an operation pattern may be set such that a plurality of movable characters move in a stepwise manner, such as moving the movable character in order. The operation pattern is set so that the upper, lower, left, and right movable objects are operated stepwise in the order of, for example, upper, lower, left, and right. May be operated step by step in order. With this configuration, after the movable movable object operates with little setting difference between the set value 1 and the installation value 3, the high setting is set depending on to what stage the plurality of types of movable auditoriums operate. A setting suggestion that can be determined can be produced. This allows the player to pay attention to the operation of the movable auditorium, which basically does not always affect the suggestion of the set value, like the upper movable auditorium that always operates. And, in this way, by performing a setting suggestive effect of gradually moving the movable role over a certain amount of effect time, even if the interval period is long, the player does not care about it. it can.

  In this way, in the interval period setting suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest which set value is set by the operation pattern of the movable accessory. Depending on the type of movable character to be operated in the setting suggestion effect, the degree of expectation as to whether or not the setting is high is different, and the degree of expectation as to which of the set values 1 to 3 is different, as shown in FIG. By the effect of suggesting the setting of the interval period, it is possible to improve the degree of expectation of the set value such as the big hit by the player. Further, it may be determined that the setting value 1 is the most advantageous setting value for the player depending on the type of the movable role actuated in the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, the interval period setting suggestion effect as shown in FIG. It is possible to further improve the degree of expectation of a set value such as a big hit by a person. In addition, depending on the set values (set values 1 to 3) such as the jackpot probability set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation is constant with a plurality of movable auditors, but a combination of colors in which the movable objects develop color by emitting light. May be different in the selection ratio.

  In addition, the movable role actuated to be operated in the setting suggestion effect is provided with only one type of movable role having a display unit composed of a dot matrix LED on the front side, and a plurality of types of shapes and colors are provided for each interval period between rounds. Any of the images may be selectively displayed as the accessory image. In addition, in accordance with the set values (set values 1 to 3) such as the jackpot probability set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation is constant for a plurality of accessory images, but a combination of colors of the accessory images is selected. May be different. As described above, the bonus image displayed on the movable bonus 229F002 during the interval between the rounds is set to the set value (the set value 1 to the big hit probability) set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as described below. Depending on 3), the selection ratio may be different.

  FIG. 9C is a flowchart illustrating the big hit start effect setting process. At the time of the big hit start effect setting process, when the effect control command designating to start the big hit game state is received and when the big hit game state is started, a part of the special figure hit waiting process (S173) in FIG. Is a process performed as follows.

  First, when the effect control CPU 120 receives an effect control command that specifies a jackpot type for starting a jackpot game state, based on the received command, the jackpot game state to be started is a jackpot 15 rounds jackpot. It is determined whether or not there is (229FS001). In the case of a 15-round big hit (Y in 229FS001), the effect control CPU 120 highlights a special effect at the start of each round as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A), (D), and (F). The process table set to be executed is selected (229FS002), and the process ends. On the other hand, production control CPU 120 ends the process if it is not a 15-round big hit (N in 229FS001).

If a process table set to execute highlighting as a special effect is selected at the start of a round at 229FS002 in the big hit start effect setting process, the process table is set in the big hit medium effect process of FIG. Based on the set data, highlighting as a special effect is executed at the start of each round as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A), (D), and (F).

  FIG. 9D is a flowchart illustrating the interval effect setting process. The interval effect setting process is a process performed as a part of the process during the big hit effect process (S176) in FIG.

  First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a time after the special winning opening opening designation command which is an effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the special winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state. It is determined whether or not it is time to start closing the special winning opening by checking whether or not it is (229FS005). Thereby, it is confirmed whether or not it is the start of the interval period between each round.

  If the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is the time of receiving the designated command after opening the special winning opening (Y in 229FS005), it determines whether or not the running big hit game state is the 15 round big hit game state. (229FS006). When the game state is the 15 round big hit game state (Y in 229FS006), the effect control CPU 120 extracts the effect selection random number of the interval period setting suggestion effect, and uses the interval period setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 9B. As described above, the type of the interval period setting suggestion effect according to the current setting value (the setting values 1 to 3) is determined, and data for executing the determined interval period setting suggestion effect is set (229FS007). The processing ends. On the other hand, if it is not a 15-round big hit (N in 229FS006), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the effect executed during the previous round as a normal interval effect (229FS008), and executes the processing. finish.

  In 229FS007 in the big hit start effect setting process, when the type of the interval period setting suggestion effect is determined and the data for executing the determined interval period setting suggestion effect is set, in the big hit middle effect process of FIG. 229FS007, an interval period setting suggestion effect is executed in the interval period between the rounds as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (C) and (E).

[Suggested rendition suggestion based on movement pattern of movable character]
In the interval period of each round, whether the reserved storage information (reserved information) that is a big hit is included in the reserved stored information (reserved information) or not (whether the reserved storage information is a reserved ream) is determined. Is performed, and when the stored storage information that becomes a big hit is included, for example, an operation pattern is selected from a plurality of types of operation patterns of the movable role as shown in FIG. By performing the operation, the effect control CPU 120 may execute an effect indicating that the retained storage information that will be a big hit is included (holding continuous suggested effect). For example, as a selection table for selecting an operation pattern of a movable auditorium, a data table in which data distribution of operation pattern selection is set so that a high setting is determined unless a held consecutive suggestion effect is performed is used. Alternatively, the operation pattern of the movable accessory may be selected. Specifically, in the selection table for selecting the operation pattern of the movable auditorium, as a special operation pattern, when the low setting is set, it is selected only when there is held storage information to be held, and when the high setting is set. The data distribution for selecting an operation pattern may be set so that the selection is made even if there is no pending storage information that is a pending sequence. In this way, it is possible to make the high setting almost fixed unless the pending consecutive suggestion effect is executed. When the operation pattern of the movable role is selected in this manner, the player can pay attention to the game after the big hitting game state ends, because the pending ream is related to the effect. In addition,
As the holding continuous suggestion effect based on the operation pattern of the movable auditorium, in addition to the interval period of each round or not during the interval period of each round, the production may be performed during the round, and may be performed during the round. (At the end of the gaming state).

[Setting suggestion effect by character image]
Also, a plurality of types of character images can be selectively displayed along with the above-described special effect image or included in the special effect image, and a setting suggestion effect is controlled by the type of the displayed character image. May be executed by the application CPU 120. In that case, the selection ratio of the type of the character image may be changed according to the setting values 1 to 3. When the setting suggestion effect is performed according to the type of the character image to be displayed, the operation of the movable character selected as described above and the display of the character image selected as described above are performed in the interval period of each round. A setting suggestion effect may be performed by a combination.

  In addition, as the big hit game state, an example is shown in which control is performed to repeat a predetermined game in which a special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened for a predetermined period. May be controlled to repeat a predetermined game for opening the winning port of the game.

  Further, as an example of the special effect, an example is described in which the special effect is executed only at the time of the 15R big hit which is advantageous to the player. That is, a special effect may be executed regardless of the type of the big hit. As described above, as a special effect, when a plurality of types of big hits are provided, some special hit types may be executed, or all the big hit types may be executed. In addition, when a special effect is performed in a jackpot game state of a jackpot type advantageous to the player, the type of the jackpot advantageous to the player performing the special effect may be one type or a plurality of types. You may.

  Further, the setting of the jackpot probability or the like is not limited to three types such as the set value 1 to the set value 3, and various types of set values such as ten types may be provided.

Next, main effects obtained by the characteristic portion 229F will be described.
[1] At the start of each round as the predetermined game, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and (D), in the big hit game state of the 15R big hit which is advantageous to the player among the 15R big hit and the 5R big hit. , 15R, a special effect including an effect of highlighting that it is a big hit is executed.

  [2] As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) to (F) and (G) to (L), each round as a predetermined game is a special winning prize ball device 7 of the special variable prize ball device 7 in a jackpot game state. Is executed a predetermined number of times in the open state, so that it is possible to further enhance the interest in the effects related to the game round in the big hit game state.

  [3] Since the big hit game state controlled when the variable display result becomes the big hit display result is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the special display is executed, so that the display result of the variable display is reduced. It is possible to improve the entertainment of the effect in the gaming state controlled when the big hit display result is obtained.

  [4] As shown in FIG. 9A, since the interval period between rounds (3 seconds) in the 15R jackpot is longer than the interval period between rounds (2 seconds) in the 5R jackpot, it is advantageous in a short time in the 15R jackpot. It is possible to prevent the gambling property from being too high due to an excessive state (a state in which a prize can be won).

[5] Movable with the effect type of the movable role selected from FIG. 9-2 during the interval period between each round, as in the movable role 229F002 and 229F003 of FIGS. 9-1 (D) and (F). Since the accessory is operated, during the interval between the rounds, the player can draw attention to the operation of the movable accessory.

  [6] As shown in FIG. 9B, since the selection ratio of the effect type for the interval period setting suggestion by the movable character is different between the set value 1 and the set value 3, the player may pay attention to the operation pattern of the movable object. it can.

  [7] As shown in FIG. 9B, the selection ratio of the type of the effect of the interval period setting suggestion by the movable character differs between the set value 1 and the set value 3, so that the operation pattern of the movable object can be noticed.

  [8] As described in [Setting suggestion effect by character image], as shown in FIG. Since it is possible to indicate whether the character image is set, the player can be made to pay attention to the type of the character image.

  The control in FIG. 8 and the control in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4 may be applied in combination with each other. That is, the control related to the setting of the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK and the control related to the effect of the characteristic portion 229F may be combined.

[Explanation about the characteristic part 230F]
Next, the characteristic portion 230F of the present embodiment will be described. In the characteristic portion 230F, a period from the end of a predetermined game such as the end of a round in the big hit game state as an advantageous state for the player to the start of the next predetermined game such as the start of the next round, that is, In the interval period between rounds, an interval period setting suggesting effect that indicates which of the set values 1 to 3 is set to the set value such as the jackpot winning probability described above can be executed by image display. An example of effect control will be described.

  In the characteristic portion 229F of this embodiment, an example in which the interval period setting suggestion effect is executed by operating the upper movable auditorium 229F002 during the interval period between rounds in the big hit game state as shown in FIG. showed that. On the other hand, in the characteristic portion 230F, the character image is displayed on the image display device 5 instead of the movable auditorium without operating the movable auditorium 229F002 during the interval period between each round in the big hit game state. , An interval period setting suggestion effect can be executed.

  As the character images to be displayed for executing the interval period setting suggestion effect on the image display device 5 during the interval period between the rounds, a plurality of types of character images having different types of characters, that is, character A images to character D images Use the character image selected from among them.

  FIG. 9-5 is a diagram showing, in a table format, an interval period setting suggestive effect determination table used to select a character image to be displayed in an interval period between rounds in a 15R big hit jackpot gaming state. 9-5 is stored in the ROM 121.

In FIG. 9-5, the set value 1 is set to the correspondence between the type of the character image displayed in the interval period setting suggestion effect and the allocation of the random number for the interval period setting suggestion effect selection (indicated by%). Time, when set to set value 2 and when set to set value 3, respectively. The effect selection random number of the interval period setting suggestion effect is an effect selection random number updated by the effect control CPU 120.

  As shown in FIG. 9-5, the types of character images to be displayed in the interval period setting suggestive effect are “character A image”, “character B image”, “character C image”, “character D image”, and “character D image”. All character images (all character images of characters A to D) ".

  As shown in FIG. 9-5, the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect for displaying the “character A image” is selected is 90% or more for each of the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting value 3, and The setting suggestion effect for displaying the “character A image” is selected at an extremely high rate. As shown in FIG. 9-5, the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect for displaying the “character A image” is selected has a relationship of “setting value 1 <setting value 2 <setting value 3”. Accordingly, when the setting suggestion effect of displaying the “character A image” is performed, the ratio of the setting value 3 is the highest.

  As shown in FIG. 9-5, the selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect for displaying the character image other than the setting suggestion effect for displaying the “character A image” is set value 1, setting value 2, and setting value 3 In each case is 10% or less. The ratio at which the setting suggestion effect for displaying the “character B image” is selected has a relationship of “setting value 1 <setting value 2 <setting value 3”. Thus, when the setting suggestion effect of displaying the “character B image” is performed, the ratio of the setting value 3 is the highest.

  As shown in FIG. 9-5, the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect for displaying the “character C image” is selected has a relationship of “setting value 3 <setting value 1 <setting value 2”. Thus, when the “character C image” is displayed, the ratio of the setting value 2 is the highest. As shown in FIG. 9C, the ratio at which the “character D image” is selected has a relationship of “set value 3 <set value 2 <set value 1”. Thus, when the setting suggestion effect for displaying the “character D image” is displayed, the ratio of the setting value 1 is the highest. As shown in FIG. 9C, the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect for displaying “all characters image” is selected has a relationship of “setting value 2, 3 <setting value 1”, and is 0 for setting values 2 and 3. %. Thus, when the setting suggestion effect of displaying “all character images” is performed, it is determined that the setting value is 1.

  According to FIG. 9-5, a setting suggestion effect of displaying “character B” other than the setting suggestion effect of displaying “character A image”, a setting suggestion effect of displaying “character C image”, and “character D” Is displayed, and the setting suggestion effect that displays “all character images” has a ratio that the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is higher than the setting value 1 that is the lower setting. high. Thus, a setting suggestion effect of displaying a "character B image" other than the setting suggestion effect of displaying a "character A image", a setting suggestion effect of displaying a "character C image", and a setting suggestion effect of displaying a "character D image" When each of the effect and the setting suggestion effect for displaying “all character images” is displayed, the degree of expectation of the higher setting is higher than the lower setting.

When the type of the setting suggestion effect for displaying the character image is selected using the interval period setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 9-5, the setting suggestion effect for displaying the “character A image” is basically executed at a high frequency. The setting suggestion effect of displaying the “character B image” at a lower frequency than the setting suggestion effect of displaying the “character A image”, the setting suggestion effect of displaying the “character C image”, and the “character D image” are displayed. Either a setting suggestion effect or a setting suggestion effect of displaying “all character images” is executed. Depending on the type of the character image, the degree of expectation as to whether or not the setting is high is different, and the degree of expectation as to which of the set values 1 to 3 is different. Therefore, the interval period setting suggestive effect as shown in FIG. It is possible to improve the degree of expectation of a set value such as a big hit by a player. Further, since the setting value 1 that is most advantageous to the player may be determined depending on the type of the character image, the setting value such as the big hit by the player is provided by the interval period setting suggesting effect as shown in FIG. Can be further improved.

  In the characteristic portion 230F of the present embodiment, the big hit start effect setting process in FIG. 9C and the interval effect setting process in FIG. 9D are executed in the same manner as that described in the characteristic portion 229F. In the effect of the jackpot game state of the 15R jackpot shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) to (E), the effect of setting the interval period during the interval period is indicated by using the character image from the effect using the movable auditorium 229F002. It is possible to execute with the effect pattern replaced with the effect that has been performed.

[Execution frequency control of setting suggestion effect according to situation controlled to big hit gaming state]
Next, an example will be described in which the execution frequency of the effect is changed in the interval period setting suggestive effect according to the situation in which the big hit gaming state is controlled. As the above-described effect of suggesting the setting of the interval period, an example is described in which the effect is always executed in the interval period of each round. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For each round, whether or not to execute an interval period setting suggestion effect is selected by lottery, and when a lottery result of executing is performed, as shown in FIG. 9-2 or FIG. 9-5. The effect type of the interval period setting suggestion effect during the interval period may be selected using the appropriate interval period setting suggestion effect determination table. In that case, the execution frequency of the effect may be made different depending on the situation where the big hit gaming state is controlled as follows. For example, the present time is confirmed by a clock means such as a real-time clock provided in a pachinko gaming machine, and an interval period setting suggestion effect is provided in a predetermined period when a game store is opened (so-called first morning) compared to other periods. May be increased. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine, the number of consecutive games (the number of times a big hit occurs continuously, for example, a probability change state, and an event in which a big hit occurs during a special game state after the end of the big hit game state such as a time saving state The number of consecutive times) may be counted, and the ratio of selecting to execute the interval period setting suggesting effect may be increased as the number of extended rooms increases.

[Setting suggestion effect in the interval period between specific rounds]
An example in which the setting suggestion effect (the effect by the movable character, the effect by the character image) performed in the interval period between the rounds shown in the characteristic portions 229F and 230F is performed in each round (all rounds). . However, the setting suggestion effect executed in the interval period between the rounds may be executed during a part of the entire rounds, for example, executed only in the interval period between the 5R and 6R rounds. Good.

  As the effect of suggesting an interval period setting, at least one of an effect by the operation of the movable character as shown in FIG. 9-1 and an effect by image display such as a character image as shown in FIG. 9-5 may be executed. Therefore, as the effect of suggesting the interval period setting, any one of the effect of performing only the effect by the operation of the movable character, the execution of the effect only by the image display, and the effect of combining the operation of the movable character and the image display is performed. May be performed.

  In addition, as an example of performing an interval period setting suggestion effect using a character image, an effect using a plurality of different types of character images has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The operation may be performed in different types of operation modes, and an effect suggesting the set value may be made by changing the selection ratio of the plurality of types of operation modes according to the set value for one character image.

Next, main effects obtained by the characteristic portion 230F will be described.
[1] During the interval period between rounds in the big hit game state, as setting suggestive effects of setting values of setting values 1 to 3, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9
9-2 (C), (E) can be executed as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (C) and (E). Since there is a pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the set value, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect during the interval period between rounds of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Although a plurality of movable characters are provided as described above, an effect indicating whether the number of the set value such as the jackpot probability or the like is even / odd may be executed by a combination of the operations of the characters. For example, when the two movable characters are operated when the set values are set values 1 to 6, it is suggested that odd numbers such as set value 1, set value 3, and set value 5 are set. Alternatively, if the four movable roles are operated, it may be suggested that the setting is an even-numbered setting such as setting value 2, setting value 4, and setting value 6.

  [2] In FIG. 9-2 and FIG. 9-5, the selection ratio of a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects differs according to the setting value 1 to the setting value 3, so that the player can pay attention to the type of setting suggestion effect. In addition, the interest in the game can be further improved.

  [3] As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A) to (F) and 229FS007 in FIG. In this case, the interval period setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the effect executed when the game is controlled to the big hit game state of the 15R big hit can be noticed.

  [4] As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and (D), a special effect including an effect of highlighting a 15R big hit can be executed at the start of the round. The amusement of the performance can be further improved.

  [5] As shown in FIG. 9A, since the interval period between rounds (3 seconds) in the 15R jackpot is longer than the interval period between rounds (2 seconds) in the 5R jackpot, it is advantageous in a short time at the 15R jackpot. It is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high due to an unreasonable state (a winning state).

  [6] As shown in [Execution frequency control of setting suggestion effect according to situation controlled to big hit gaming state], execution frequency of setting suggestion effect varies according to the situation when controlled to big hit gaming state. In addition, since the situation when the state is controlled to the big hit gaming state is added to the effect, the interest of the game can be further improved.

  [7] As shown in [Execution frequency control of setting suggestion effect according to situation controlled to big hit gaming state], in the interval period between specific rounds, for example, between the 5R and 6R rounds, the interval period Since the suggestion effect is executable, the player can pay attention to the effect during a specific round.

[8] As shown in FIG. 9-6 to be described later, an over-winning setting suggesting effect may be executable in connection with over-winning in each round. In this case, it is possible to improve the amusement of the effect when the game balls having more than the upper limit of the winning number of each round win the special variable winning ball apparatus 7.
[9] As shown in [Example of execution of an over-winning setting suggestion effect in an interval period between rounds] described below, when an over-winning setting suggestion effect is also executed, an interval period setting suggestion effect and an over-winning setting suggestion effect are performed. By enabling any setting suggestion effect when the execution periods overlap with each other, each setting suggestion effect is reliably executed even when the execution timings of multiple setting suggestion effects overlap. , The interest of the game can be improved.

  The control in FIG. 8 and the control in FIG. 9-5 may be applied in combination with each other. That is, the control related to the setting of the characteristic units 71AK to 75AK and the control related to the effect of the characteristic unit 230F may be combined.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic portion 230F)
Regarding the above-described characteristic portion 230F, there is a gaming machine whose setting value can be changed, which is described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine that performs an effect during an interval from the end of a plurality of round games as a predetermined game to the start of the next round game during a jackpot game state as an advantageous state, There is one described in US Pat. However, in the technology described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2013-252283, during a period from the end of a predetermined game of a gaming machine provided with a set value to the start of the next predetermined game. There was room for improvement in the production. Therefore, the present invention relates to the characteristic portion 230F for providing a gaming machine capable of improving the entertainment of the effect during the period from the end of the predetermined game of the gaming machine provided with the set value to the start of the next predetermined game. As a gaming machine of the means 1,
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Setting means (such as the game control microcomputer 100) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values;
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 or the like) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage (big hit probability or the like) for the player is different based on the set values (the set value 1 to the set value 3). With
The advantageous state is a state configured by repeating a plurality of predetermined games (such as opening the special variable winning ball device 7),
A setting suggestion effect indicating which set value is set in a period (interval period between rounds) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (FIGS. 9A and 9B). (Interval period setting suggestion effect of performing a setting suggestion effect of displaying the character image of FIG. 9-5, etc.) (FIG. 9-1 (C), ( E) etc.),
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the effect of the gaming machine provided with the set value during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 230F,
The execution ratios of the plurality of setting suggestion effects provided in accordance with the setting values are different (in FIG. 9-2 and FIG. 9-5, the selection ratios of the plurality of types of setting suggestion effects are different in accordance with the setting values 1 to 3). Different, etc.),
It may be a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 230F.
According to such a configuration, the type of the setting suggestion effect can be noticed, and the interest of the game is improved.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 230F,
The advantageous state includes at least a first advantageous state (such as a 15R big hit) and a second advantageous state (such as a 5R big hit) which is more disadvantageous than the first advantageous state,
In the first advantageous state, the setting suggestion effect can be executed (FIGS. 9-1 (A) to (F), 229FS007 in FIG. 9-4, and the like).
The game machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 230F characterized by the following may be used.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the effect performed when the first advantageous state is controlled.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 according to the characteristic portion 230F,
In the first advantageous state, a special effect can be executed at the start of the predetermined game (FIGS. 9-1 (A), (D), etc.),
It may be a gaming machine of the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 230F characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, since the special effect is executed at the start of the predetermined game, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect related to the predetermined game.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 relating to the characteristic portion 230F,
A period from the end of the predetermined game in the first advantageous state to the start of the next predetermined game (interval period between rounds of 3 seconds, etc.) is from the end of the predetermined game in the second advantageous state. Longer than the period up to the start of the next predetermined game (such as an interval period between rounds of 2 seconds) (FIG. 9-1 and the like);
The game machine of the means 3 or the means 4 according to the characteristic portion 230F characterized by the above may be used.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being too high due to the first advantageous state becoming too advantageous in a short period of time.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 according to the characteristic portion 230F,
The execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the situation when the state is controlled to the advantageous state ([execution frequency control of the setting suggestion effect according to the situation controlled to the big hit gaming state]).
The gaming machine of the means 1 to means 5 according to the characteristic portion 230F characterized by the above may be used.
According to such a configuration, the situation at the time of controlling to the advantageous state is also taken into consideration, so that the interest of the game is improved.

As a gaming machine of the means 7 relating to the characteristic portion 230F,
The setting suggestion effect can be executed in a period from the end of the specific predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an interval period between rounds between 5R and 6R) ([ Proposal setting suggestion during the interval period between specific rounds] etc.),
The gaming machine of the means 1 to means 6 according to the characteristic part 230F characterized by the above may be used.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to a period from the end of a specific predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game.

As a gaming machine of the means 8 relating to the characteristic portion 230F,
Variable prize means (special variable prize) that can be changed between a first state (open state or the like) in which game media (game balls and the like) can be won and a second state (closed state or the like) in which game media cannot be won or cannot be won. Ball device 7 etc.)
Variable prize control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the variable prize means from the first state to the second state when a predetermined number (upper limit of the number of prize) of game media has won the variable prize means. And further comprising
The setting suggestion effect can be executed in connection with the fact that more game media than the predetermined number have won the variable winning means (over winning) (over winning setting suggesting effect in FIG. 9-6).
The gaming machine of the means 1 to means 6 according to the characteristic part 230F characterized by the above may be used.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the effect when more than a predetermined number of game media have won the variable winning means.

As a gaming machine of the means 9 relating to the characteristic portion 230F,
The setting suggestion effect (interval period setting suggestion effect, etc.) executed during a period (interval period between rounds, etc.) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and more than the predetermined number When the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect (over winning setting suggestion effect, etc.) executed in connection with the fact that the game medium has won the variable winning means (over winning, etc.), any of the setting suggestions is performed. An effect can also be executed ([Example of an effect for suggesting an over-winning setting during an interval between rounds]),
It may be a gaming machine of the means 8 according to the characteristic portion 230F characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, even when the execution timings of a plurality of setting suggestion effects overlap, each setting suggestion effect is reliably executed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Description of feature portion 231F]
Next, the characteristic portion 231F of the present embodiment will be described. In each round of the jackpot game state, the special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened, and the game ball can enter the special variable winning ball device 7. For each round of the jackpot game state, an upper limit is set for the number of winnings in the special variable winning ball device 7, and when the winning number reaches the upper limit, the big winning opening is closed. In some rounds, a prize exceeding the upper limit may be generated by a game ball that has been won before it is determined that the game ball has been determined.

  Such winning of a game ball exceeding the upper limit of the winning number in each round is called over winning. When it is determined that an over prize has occurred, it is possible to execute an over prize effect that is a specific effect related to the occurrence of an over prize, such as notifying that an over prize has occurred. As for the over-winning effect, multiple types of over-winning effects are provided, and for each round, the type of over-winning effect is selected each time an over-win occurs, and the selected over-winning effect is executed. It is executed by the CPU 120.

  In the characteristic part 231F, as an over-winning effect, in addition to the occurrence of over-winning, an over-indicator that can indicate which of the set values 1 to 3 the set value such as the above-described jackpot winning probability is set. A description will be given of an example in which a winning setting suggestion effect is executed, and the execution ratio (selection ratio) of the effect provided for the effect type differs according to the set value 1 to 3 such as a jackpot winning probability for the over winning setting suggestion effect. . Such an over prize setting suggestion effect is executed during an interval period between rounds immediately after the over prize occurs.

  FIG. 9-6 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing an example of an effect of the over winning setting suggestion effect according to the characteristic portion 231F.

  FIG. 9-6 shows the effect states of the over-winning-prize setting suggestion effect on the image display device 5 when the low setting value 3 is set in (A) to (C). (F) shows an effect mode of the over-win winning setting suggesting effect on the image display device 5 when the setting value 1 which is the high setting is set.

  As shown in (A) to (C) and (D) to (F), when the setting suggestion effect is executed during the interval between rounds, a predetermined character image 231F001 is displayed, and the character image is displayed. A normal image 231F002 displaying the character "Lucky!", A high setting suggestion image 231F003 displaying the character "Chance!", And a character "Excellent!" The over-prize setting suggestion image selected and determined from the high setting final images 231F004 displayed is displayed.

For these over winning setting suggestion images, as shown in FIG. 9-7 described later, the expected degree of high setting such as setting value 1 and setting value 2 is “normal image 231F002 (“ lucky! ”) <High setting. The selection ratio is set such that the relationship of the suggestion image 231F003 (“Chance!”) <The high setting final image 231F004 (“Excellent!”) Is established. In particular, the high setting confirmation image 231F004 (“Excellent!”) Is an over-winning setting suggestion image that confirms that the high setting is set.

  In FIG. 9-6, for example, when one over-winning is detected during one round, one over-winning is detected as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9D. In response to the above, one over-prize setting suggestion image of any type selected as described above is displayed. (A) and (B) show display examples when the normal image 231F002 is selected.

  In FIG. 9-6, for example, when two over winnings are detected during one round, two over winnings are detected as shown in (B) and (E). In response to each of the above, two types of over-winning setting suggestion images of any type selected as described above are displayed. (B) shows a display example when the normal image 231F002 is selected and displayed in the order of winning, corresponding to each of the two over winnings. In (E), when the high setting suggestion image 231F003 is selected and displayed corresponding to the first over-winning, and then the normal image 231F002 is selected and displayed corresponding to the second over-winning. Is shown.

  In FIG. 9-6, for example, when three over winnings are detected during one round, three over winnings are detected as shown in (C) and (F). In response to each of the above, three types of over-winning setting suggestion images of any type selected as described above are displayed. (C) shows a display example when the normal image 231F002 is selected and displayed in the order of winning, corresponding to each of the three over winnings. In (F), the high setting final image 231F004 is selected and displayed corresponding to the first over-winning, and then the normal image 231F002 is selected corresponding to each of the second and third over-winning. A display example when the prizes are displayed in the winning order is shown.

  When three over-wins are detected during one round shown in FIG. 9-6, three over-wins are detected, as shown in (C) and (F). Corresponding to each, three types of over-winning setting suggestion images of any type selected as described above are displayed. In FIG. 9-6, when the high setting suggestion image 231F003 is displayed as in (E) or (F), the expectation of the high setting is higher than when only the normal image 231F002 is displayed. The expectation of the person can be improved. Further, when the high setting final image 231F004 is displayed, the high setting is finalized, so that the player's expectation can be further improved.

  As for the effect of suggesting an over-winning setting, an effect in an effect mode in which the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission by the luminous body such as the game effect lamp 9 and the image display by the image display device 5 are combined is executed. You may do so. In addition, with regard to the effect of suggesting an over-winning setting, an effect may be executed by combining all or a part of such sound, light emission, and image, such as sound only, light emission only, or image only. An effect by a single effect means may be executed. In the case of performing an over-winning setting suggesting effect using the light-emitting body, a light-emitting means such as a lamp provided at a predetermined position (for example, a position around a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening) is used as a big hit. Light may be emitted in a different color (or a different light emission pattern such as a different blinking pattern) according to the above-described set value such as the probability.

  FIG. 9-7 is a diagram showing, in a table form, an over-winning-prize setting suggestion effect determination table used to select an effect type (a type of over-win-winning setting suggestion image) of a setting suggestion effect to be executed as an over-winning setting suggestion effect. is there. The over prize setting suggestion effect determination table is stored in the ROM 121.

  In FIG. 9-7, the over winning setting suggesting effect determination table is a first over winning setting suggesting effect determining table (FIG. 9-7 (A)) used when the setting value is 1, and when the setting value is 2. The second over-prize setting suggestion effect determination table (FIG. 9-7 (B)) used for (3) and the third over-win winning setting suggestion effect determination table (FIG. 9-7 (C)) used when the setting value is 3. )including. In these over-winning setting suggesting effect determination tables, the effect type of over-winning setting suggesting effect (type of over-winning setting suggesting image), over-winning number, and random number for over-winning setting suggesting effect selection (displayed in%) ) Is set. The random number for effect selection for suggesting an over prize setting of the effect is a random number for effect selection which is updated by the effect control CPU 120.

  As shown in each table of FIGS. 9-7 (A) to (C), the type of the over-winning setting suggestion image displayed in the over-winning setting suggestion effect is such that the type of the over-winning setting suggestion image is “display normal image”. , "Display of high setting suggestion image", and "display of high setting finalized image".

  As shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C, the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect of “displaying a normal image” is selected is set value 1, set value 2, and set value 3, respectively. It is 89% or more, and the setting suggestion effect for “displaying a normal image” is basically selected at an extremely high rate. As shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C, the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect of “displaying a normal image” is selected has a relationship of “setting value 1 <setting value 2, setting value 3”. is there. Thus, when the setting suggestion effect of “displaying a normal image” is performed, the ratio of the setting value 3 is the highest. On the other hand, at least one of a setting suggestion effect of “displaying a high setting suggestion image” and a setting suggestion effect of “displaying a high setting confirmation image” other than the setting suggestion effect of “displaying a normal image” Are selected values 1 to 3 and are 11% or less.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C, the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect of “displaying a high setting suggestion image” is selected is “setting value 2> setting value 1> setting value 3”. Have a relationship. Therefore, when the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the high setting suggestion image” is performed, the ratio of the setting value 1 or the setting value 2 is higher than the ratio of the setting value 3. Thereby, when the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the high setting suggestion image” is performed in the over winning setting suggestion effect, the player's sense of expectation for the high setting of the player can be increased.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C, the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the high setting final image” is selected is “setting value 1> setting value 2> setting value 3”. In the setting 3, the selection ratio is 0%. Therefore, when a setting suggestion effect of “displaying a high setting final image” is performed in the over winning setting suggestion effect, it is determined that the setting value is 1 or 2. Thereby, when the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the high setting final image” is performed in the over winning setting suggestion effect, the player's sense of expectation for the high setting of the player can be further increased. Furthermore, since the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the high setting confirmation image” is selected has a relationship of “setting value 1> setting value 2”, the “high setting confirmation image display” Is performed, the expectation of the player for the set value 1 can be increased.

As shown in FIGS. 9-7 (A) to (C), as the number of over-winning pieces increases, the first over-winning setting suggestion effect determination table of (A) used when the setting value is a high setting of 1 is used. The second over-prize setting suggestion effect determination table of (B) used when the setting value is 2 and the high setting is the third over-prize setting suggestion of (C) used when the setting value is 2 which is low. Compared to the effect determination table, the data that displays the effect that displays the high setting suggestion image and the effect that displays the high setting confirmation suggestion image have a higher data rate so that the ratio selected as the setting suggestion effect increases as the number of over winnings increases. Is set. As a result, as the number of over-winning winnings increases, the reliability of the suggested effect of the set value by the over-winning setting suggesting effect increases.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C, as the number of over-winning wins increases, the rate at which the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the high setting final image” is selected increases, and the “high setting win” is selected. Since the data setting is such that the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect of "displaying the setting confirmation image" is selected is increased, as the number of over winnings increases, the effect of the effect increases and the player for the high setting Expectations can be increased.

  FIG. 9-8 is a flowchart showing the command analysis processing (S75) of FIG. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a new received command by checking the data of the effect control command receiving buffer (231FS001). If there is a new received command (Y in 231FS001), effect control CPU 120 shifts to 231FS002. On the other hand, when there is no new received command, effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

  In 231FS002, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a special winning opening winning notification command as a new received command. If there is a special winning opening winning notification (Y in 231FS002), the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the count value of the special winning opening winning number counter (the special winning opening winning number count value) (231FS003), and The winning flag is set (231FS004), and the flow shifts to 231FS005.

  The special winning opening winning notification command is an effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 for each winning detection when it is detected that a game ball has won the special winning opening. The special winning opening winning number counter is a counting means for counting the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening in each round. The special winning opening winning number counter is initialized at the start of each round so that the number of winnings to the special winning opening for each round can be counted.

  On the other hand, when there is no special winning opening winning notification command as a new received command, that is, when another command is newly received (N in 231FS002), effect control CPU 120 responds to the received command. The effect-related settings are made (231FS011), and the process ends.

  In 231FS005, the effect control CPU 120 compares the large winning opening winning number count value updated in 231FS005 with the upper limit of the winning number set for each round to determine whether or not an over-win has occurred. judge. The effect control CPU 120 shifts to 231FS006 when an over-winning has occurred (Y in 231FS005). On the other hand, if no over-winning has occurred (N in 231FS005), effect control CPU 120 ends the process. In 231FS006, the effect control CPU 120 compares the large winning opening winning number count value updated in 231FS005 with the upper limit of the winning number set for each round, and thus the number of overwinning is one. It is determined whether or not. If the number of over winnings is one (Y in 231FS006), effect control CPU 120 sets the first over winning flag, and ends the process. The effect control CPU 120 shifts to 231FS008 when the number of over winnings is not one (N in 231FS006).

In 231FS008, the effect control CPU 120 compares the large winning opening winning number count value updated in 231FS005 with the upper limit of the winning number set for each round, and determines whether or not there are two over winnings. Is determined. If there are two over-wins (Y in 231FS008), effect control CPU 120 sets a second over-win prize flag (231FS009), and ends the process. If the number of over winnings is not two, that is, if the number of over winnings is three or more (N in 231FS008), effect control CPU 120 sets a third over winning flag (231FS010), and ends the process. .

  FIG. 9-9 is a flowchart showing the over-winning process. The over-winning prize processing is performed as a part of the processing in the big hit middle production processing (S176) in FIG.

  First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special winning opening winning flag set in FIG. 9-8 is set (231FS020). If the special winning opening winning flag is set (Y in 231FS020), the effect control CPU 120 resets the special winning opening winning flag (231FS021) and shifts to 231FS022. On the other hand, if the special winning opening winning flag is not set (N in 231FS020), effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

  In 231FS022, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether any of the first to third over-winning flags that can be set in the command analysis processing of FIG. 9-8 has been set. If any of the over-winning flags is set (Y in 231FS022), effect control CPU 120 shifts to 231FS023. On the other hand, when no over-winning flag is set (N in 231FS022), effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

  In 231FS023, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first over-winning flag is set. If the first over-winning flag is set (Y in 231FS023), the effect control CPU 120 extracts an effect selection random number for an effect of suggesting an over-winning setting, and the first over-winning in FIG. 9-7 (A). Based on the setting suggestion effect determination table, the type of the over-winning setting suggestion effect for one over-winning prize is determined (231FS024), and the process proceeds to 231FS028. On the other hand, when the first over-winning flag is not set (N in 231FS023), effect control CPU 120 shifts to 231FS025.

  In 231FS025, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second over-winning flag is set. When the second over-winning flag is set (Y in 231FS025), effect-controlling CPU 120 extracts an effect selection random number for an effect of suggesting an over-winning setting, and the second over-winning in FIG. 9B. Based on the setting suggestion effect determination table, the type of the over-winning setting suggestion effect for two winnings is determined (231FS026), and the process proceeds to 231FS028. On the other hand, when the second over-winning flag is not set, that is, when the third over-winning flag is set (N in 231FS025), the effect-controlling CPU 120 determines the effect selection random number of the over-winning setting suggesting effect. Then, based on the third over prize setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 9-7 (C), the type of over prize setting suggestion effect of three or more over prize is determined (231FS027), and the process proceeds to 231FS028.

  In 231FS028, effect control CPU 120 resets the over-winning flag set. Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays an over-winning setting suggestion image as shown in FIG. 9-6 by executing an over-winning setting suggesting effect of the type determined in 231FS024, 231FS026, or 231FS027 (231FS029). , And the process ends.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the over-winning setting suggesting effect as shown in FIG. 9-6 by executing the over-winning process of FIG. 9-9. The over-prize setting suggestion effect is executed each time an over-prize occurs.

[Example of suggestion of over-winning setting based on the number of prize balls paid out by over-winning]
In the above-described over-prize setting suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 9-7, an example is shown in which the selection ratio of a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects is changed according to the number of over-winning game balls (the number of over-prize winning). However, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the over-prize setting suggestion effect is based on the large number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the over-prized game balls (the total number of prize balls based on the over-prize in each round). Depending on the value, the selection ratio of the plurality of types of setting suggestion effects may be made different. For example, in FIG. 9-7, “one over-winning prize ball” is replaced with “15 over-winning prize balls” and the like, “two over-winning prizes” is replaced with “30 over-winning prize balls” and the like. "" May be replaced with "45 or more over-win prize balls". In this example, as the number of prize balls paid out due to the over prize increases, the reliability of the over prize setting suggestion effect based on the number of prize balls paid out due to the over prize increases.

[Example of an over-winning setting suggestion effect in the interval period between rounds]
The above-described over-prize setting suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect performed in the interval period between the rounds indicated by the characteristic portions 229F and 230F (the effect by the movable role, the effect by the character image) are in the same jackpot game state. May be executed. In this case, the over-winning setting suggestion effect may be executed in an interval period between rounds after the round in which over-winning has occurred. In the case of performing such an effect, during the interval period between rounds, the setting suggestion effect execution conditions to be executed in the interval period between the rounds indicated by the characteristic portions 229F and 230F, and the execution of the over winning setting suggestion effect are executed. It is also conceivable that the condition may be satisfied in a mode in which the execution timings of both setting suggestive effects overlap during the interval period between rounds. When such execution periods overlap, both setting suggestion effects may be executed in parallel at overlapping timing. In such an overlapping execution period, when both setting suggestion effects are executed in parallel at the same timing, an area relating to the effect such as a display range of an image of both setting suggestion effects and an operation range of a movable character is provided. They may not overlap or may overlap.

  When such execution periods overlap, one of the setting suggestive effects may be executed with priority, or one of the setting suggestive effects may be selected and executed by lottery.

[Example of an over-winning setting suggestion effect in the ending effect]
In the ending effect process (S177) of FIG. 7, when an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state is executed, an over winning setting suggestion effect may be executed. For example, an effect of adding and updating the number of prize balls paid out based on over winning in all rounds of the jackpot game state is performed, and in the ending effect, all rounds in the jackpot game state such as “120 over prize payout prize balls” are performed. The number of prize balls paid out based on the over prize through may be displayed. In this case, a plurality of display colors of the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the over-winning may be provided, and the selection ratio of the display colors may be different depending on the set values (set values 1 to 3). In this manner, an over-winning setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the display color of the number of prize balls paid out based on over-winning.

[Direction suggesting over-winning in the interval period between specific rounds]
The example of the setting suggestion effect (the effect by the movable character, the effect by the character image) executed in the interval period between the rounds described above is executed in each round (all the rounds). However, the setting suggestion effect executed in the interval period between rounds is performed only during the interval period between the rounds of 5R and 6R, for example, for the over-prize in 5R. It may be executed only by.

Next, main effects obtained by the characteristic portion 231F will be described.
[1] As shown in FIG. 9-6, when an over-winning occurs in each round in the big hit gaming state, as a setting suggestive effect as to which of the set values 1 to 3 is set, Since the over-prize setting suggestion effect can be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the over-prize setting suggestion effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the set value.

  [2] Since the selection ratio of a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects differs according to the number of over winnings and the number of over winnings, the player can be made to pay attention to the types of setting suggesting effects.

  [3] As described in [Example of suggesting an over-winning setting based on the number of prize balls paid out due to over-winning], the over-winning setting is suggested based on the number of winning prize balls paid out due to over-winning according to the number of prize balls paid out due to over-winning. Since the reliability of the effects is different, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of prize balls paid out due to the over prize.

  [4] As shown in 231FS023 to 231FS029 of FIG. 9-9, the over-prize setting suggestion effect is executed every time an over-win occurs, so that the player pays attention to the over-win-setting suggestion effect every time an over-win occurs. Can be done.

  [5] As shown in FIG. 9-7, at the end of the jackpot gaming state, the reliability of the over-winning setting suggesting effect based on the number of over-winnings differs according to the number of over-winnings. The effect at the end of the gaming state can be noticed.

  [6] As shown in the example of the over-winning setting suggestion effect in the interval period between rounds in FIG. 9-6, the over-winning setting suggestion effect can be executed in the interval period between rounds. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance.

  The control in FIG. 8 and the control in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-9 may be applied in combination with each other. That is, the control related to the setting of the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK and the control related to the production of the characteristic portion 231F may be combined.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic portion 231F)
Regarding the above-described characteristic portion 231F, there is a game machine whose setting value can be changed, which is described in JP-A-2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-193271 discloses a gaming machine capable of executing a specific effect when a winning exceeding a maximum number occurs in a special winning opening (when a so-called over winning occurs) during a jackpot game as an advantageous state. Some are described in the gazette. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-193271, there is room for improvement in a specific effect due to an over-winning of a gaming machine provided with a set value. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 231F for providing a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a specific effect in a gaming machine provided with a set value,
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Setting means (such as the game control microcomputer 100) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values;
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 or the like) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage (big hit probability or the like) for the player is different based on the set values (the set value 1 to the set value 3). With
Variable prize means (special variable prize) that can be changed between a first state (open state or the like) in which game media (game balls and the like) can be won and a second state (closed state or the like) in which game media cannot be won or cannot be won. Ball device 7 etc.)
Variable prize control means (a microcomputer for game control) which controls the variable prize means from the first state to the second state when a predetermined number (upper limit of the number of prizes) of game media is won in the variable prize means. 100, etc.)
In connection with the fact that more game media than the predetermined number have won the variable winning means (over winning), it is possible to execute a specific effect (over winning setting suggesting effect in FIG. 9-6),
The execution ratios of the specific effects provided in plurality according to the set values are different (the selection ratios of the plurality of types of suggestion effects are different in accordance with the set values 1 to 3 in FIG. 9-7).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific effect in the gaming machine provided with the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 231F,
The execution rate of the specific effect varies depending on the number of game media winning more than the predetermined number (the number of over winnings, the number of over winnings) (see FIG. 9-7, a plurality of types of setting suggestions depending on the number of over winnings). Etc.)
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 231F may be a gaming machine.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the number of executions of the specific effect.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 231F,
The specific effect is executed in accordance with the number of game media obtained based on the number of game media winning more than the predetermined number (such as the number of prize balls paid out due to over prize) or the execution mode (over based on the number of prize balls paid out due to over prize). (E.g., [reliability of a winning setting suggesting effect, etc.)) ([Example of over winning setting suggesting effect based on the number of prize balls paid out by over winning], etc.)
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 231F may be a gaming machine.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the number of game media obtained.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 according to the characteristic portion 231F,
The specific effect is executed each time a greater number of game media than the predetermined number wins (231FS023 to 231FS029 in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-9).
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 231F may be a gaming machine.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention each time more game media than a predetermined number win.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 according to the characteristic portion 231F,
The specific effect is executed in accordance with the number of game media winning more than the predetermined number at the end of the advantageous state (such as the number of over winnings) or the execution mode (the reliability of the over winning setting suggesting effect based on the number of over winnings, etc.). Are different ([Example of execution of suggestion effect for over-winning setting in ending effect]),
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 231F may be a gaming machine.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid when the advantageous state ends.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 relating to the characteristic portion 231F,
The advantageous state is a state configured by repeating a plurality of predetermined games (such as opening the special variable winning ball device 7),
The specific effect can be executed during a period (inter-round interval between rounds) from the end of the specific predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (over time in the interval between rounds in FIG. 9-6). Prize setting suggestion production example),
It may be a gaming machine of the means 1 to 5 relating to the characteristic portion 231F characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to a period from the end of a specific predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game.

[Description of feature portion 232F]
Next, the characteristic portion 232F of the present embodiment will be described. During the big hit game state, game balls can be won in the special variable winning ball device 7, and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out each time the game is won. The payout number of the prize balls corresponding to the winning in the special variable prize ball device 7 during the big hit game state is the number of game balls obtained by the player in the big hit game state, and is referred to as an obtained number.

  In the big hit game state, every time one winning of a game ball to the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected, a special winning opening winning notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command. Sent. Each time the special winning opening winning notification command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs an operation of adding and updating the predetermined payout number of winning balls per winning ball to the special winning opening, thereby obtaining a big hit. The calculation for adding and updating the number of game balls obtained by the player during the game state is performed. The number of game balls obtained during the game state is determined in units of one big hit game state. When the number of game balls obtained in the big hit game state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, every 1000 balls), an obtained number notification effect indicating the obtained number is executed.

  In the feature portion 232F, during the big hit game state, the obtained number notification effect is to indicate the number of game balls obtained when the number of game balls obtained during the big hit game state exceeds the specified number, Execute the acquisition number setting suggestion effect that can indicate which of the setting values of the probability and the like are set to the setting values 1 to 3, and set the setting value of the jackpot winning probability and the like for the acquisition number setting suggestion effect. An example in which the execution ratio (selection ratio) of the effect provided for the effect type differs according to 1 to 3 will be described.

  FIG. 9-10 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing an example of the effect of the acquisition number setting suggestion effect according to the characteristic portion 232F.

  FIGS. 9-10 show the production modes of the acquisition number setting suggestion production on the image display device 5 when the low setting value 3 is set in (A) to (C). (F) shows an effect mode of the acquired number setting suggestion effect when the high setting value 1 is set. The specific number at which the acquired number setting suggestion effect is executed is set every 1000, for example, 1000, 2000, 3000,.... Therefore, the effect image of the acquired number setting suggestion effect is displayed when the number exceeds the specific number for every 1000 pieces.

  As shown in (A) to (C) and (D) to (F), in the acquisition number setting suggestion effect, for example, “2000 OVER” as shown in (A) and (D), (B), An acquired number image 232F001 indicating the acquired number of game balls such as "5000 shots OVER" as shown in (E) and "10000 shots OVER" as shown in (C) and (F), and a first character image .. Are displayed together with character images 232F002, 232F003, 232F004, 232F005,.

As for the character images to be displayed in the acquisition number setting suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 9 to 11 described later, at the setting values such as the setting values 1 to 3, the height setting of the first character image to the fifth character image ( The selection ratio is set such that the degree of expectation, which is set value 1 and set value 2), has a relationship of “first character image <second character image <third character image <fourth character image <fifth character image”. Have been. In particular, the fifth character image is a character image of an acquisition number setting suggestion effect that is determined to be the first setting value that is a high setting.

  The acquisition number setting suggestion effect is executed every time the number of acquisitions exceeds 1,000, and at the time of execution, a character image to be displayed is selected. Thus, as shown in (A) to (C) and (D) to (F), each time the acquired number setting suggestion effect is executed, the character image displayed as the acquired number setting suggestion effect may be different.

  FIG. 9-11 is a diagram illustrating, in a table format, an acquisition number setting suggestion effect determination table used to select an effect type (character image type) of the setting suggestion effect to be executed as the acquisition number setting suggestion effect. The acquisition number setting suggestion effect determination table is stored in the ROM 121.

  In FIG. 9-11, the acquired number setting suggestion effect determination table is a first acquisition number setting suggestion effect determination table (FIG. 9-11 (A)) used when the setting value is 1, and when the setting value is 2. The second acquisition number setting suggestion effect determination table used (FIG. 9-11 (B)) and the third acquisition number setting suggestion effect determination table used when the setting value is 3 (FIG. 9-11 (C)) including. In these acquisition number setting suggestion effect determination tables, the correspondence relationship between the type of character image displayed in the acquisition number setting suggestion effect, the acquisition number range, and the allocation of random numbers for character image selection of the effect (displayed in%) Is set. The character image selection random number is an effect selection random number updated by the effect control CPU 120.

  As shown in the tables of FIGS. 9A to 9C, the types of character images to be displayed in the setting suggestion effect of performing the acquisition number setting suggestion effect are “display of first character image” and “second character image”. Display of character image "," display of third character image "," display of fourth character image ", and" display of fifth character image ".

  As shown in FIGS. 9-11 (A) to (C), the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the fifth character image” can be selected at the setting value 1, but is selected at the setting value 2 and the setting value 3. Impossible. Therefore, when the setting suggestion effect of displaying the fifth character image is made, it is determined that the setting value is 1, and the player's expectation of the setting value 1 can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, in the low setting such as the setting value 3, the selection ratios of the setting suggestion effects for displaying the first character image to the fourth character image are the same. As shown in 9-11 (A) and (B), the setting suggestion effect selection ratio for displaying the first character image to the fourth character image at a high setting such as the setting value 1 and the setting value 2 is “No. The relationship of setting suggestion effect for displaying one character image <setting suggestion effect for displaying the second character image <setting suggestion effect for displaying the third character image <setting suggestion effect for displaying the fourth character image> Is set.

  Therefore, in the setting suggestion effect for displaying the first character image to the fourth character image, the ratio selected in the high setting is different due to such a ratio. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation of the high setting according to the type of the character image displayed in the acquired number setting suggesting effect. For example, when the fourth character image is displayed in the acquisition number setting suggestion effect, the player's expectation of the high setting can be increased as compared to when the first character image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (C), in the low setting such as the setting value 3, each of the setting suggestion effects for displaying the first character image to the fourth character image regardless of the number of acquisitions. Although the selection ratio is the same, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 (A) and (B), the set value 1 and the set value 2
The selection ratio of the setting suggestive effect for displaying the third character image and the setting suggestive effect for displaying the fourth character image at such a high setting as "1000-3000 shots <4000-9000 shots <10000 shots or more" Relationship is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-11 (A) to (C), as the number of acquisitions increases, the first acquisition number setting suggestion effect determination table of (A) used when the setting value is a high setting of 1, and The second acquisition number setting suggestion effect determination table (B) used when the setting value 2 is high is the third acquisition number setting suggestion effect (C) used when the setting value 2 is low. Data is set so that the effect of displaying the high setting suggestion image and the high setting confirmation suggestion image such as the fourth character image and the fifth character image as compared to the determination table is selected as the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate. Have been. As a result, as the number of acquisitions increases, the reliability of the suggestion effect of the set value by the acquisition number setting suggestion effect increases.

  Accordingly, among the first to fourth character images, the setting suggestion effect display for displaying a specific character image such as the third character image and the fourth character image is set at a high setting in such a relationship. In, the selection ratio varies depending on the number of acquisitions. As a result, as the number of acquisitions increases, the player's sense of expectation for a high setting based on the type of character image displayed in the acquisition number setting suggestion effect can be increased. For example, as the acquired number increases, when the third character image or the fourth character image is displayed in the acquired number setting suggesting effect, the player's expectation for the high setting is higher than when the first character image is displayed. Can be enhanced.

  FIG. 9-12 is a flowchart illustrating the acquisition number notification process. The acquisition number notification processing is performed as a part of the processing during the big hit production processing (S176) in FIG. The calculation of adding and updating the acquired number of gaming balls in the gaming state each time the special winning opening winning notification command is received is performed in a process different from the acquired number notification process.

  First, the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the confirmation of the above-described calculation result, whether the number of game balls obtained is a specific number of 1000 × n (n = 1 to 3) or more. It is determined whether or not this is not the case (232FS001). Specifically, in the case of 232FS001, it is first checked whether or not the time has exceeded 1000 rounds, then it has been checked whether or not the time has exceeded 2000 rounds, and then the time has exceeded 3000 rounds Check if it is. As described above, it is confirmed whether or not the acquired number exceeds the specified number every 1000 shots for the acquired number of 1000 to 3000 shots.

  The effect control CPU 120 selects a character image for an effect to suggest the setting of the acquired number when the acquired number of game balls is any of the excess times of 1000 × n (n = 1 to 3) (232FS001). A random number is extracted, and 1000 to 3000 shots are generated according to any of the first to third acquired number setting suggestive effect determination tables in FIGS. 9A to 9C corresponding to the set values (set values 1 to 3). The effect type including the character image to be displayed when the corresponding acquired number is exceeded during the excess is determined (232FS002), and the process proceeds to 232FS009. On the other hand, when the acquired number of game balls is not the excess time of any of 1000 × n (n = 1 to 3) shots (N in 232FS001), the effect control CPU 120 shifts the processing to 232FS003.

In 232FS003, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the above-described calculation result and indicates that the number of game balls to be obtained is a specific number of 1000 × m (m = 4 to 9) departures. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, in 232FS003, first, it is checked whether or not the time exceeds 4,000 rounds, then it is checked whether or not the time exceeds 5,000 rounds, and then, when the time exceeds 6000 rounds , Then check whether it is the time when it exceeded 7000 shots, and then check whether it is the time when it exceeded 8000 shots,
Next, it is confirmed whether or not the time has exceeded 9000 shots. As described above, it is confirmed whether or not the acquired number has exceeded the specific number for every 1000 shots for the acquired number of 4000 to 9000 shots.

  When the acquired number of game balls is any of the excess times of 1000 × m (m = 4 to 9) shots (Y in 232FS003), the effect control CPU 120 generates the effect selection random number for the effect of setting the acquired number. When the number of shots exceeds 4000 to 9000 according to one of the first to third acquired number setting suggestive effect determination tables of FIGS. 9-11 (A) to (C) according to the set values (set values 1 to 3) extracted Among them, the effect type including the character image to be displayed when the corresponding acquired number is exceeded is determined (232FS004), and the process proceeds to 232FS009. On the other hand, when the acquired number of game balls is not at any time exceeding 1000 × m (m = 4 to 9) (N in 232FS003), the effect control CPU 120 shifts the acquired number of game balls to 232FS005. I do.

  In 232FS005, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of game balls acquired is any one of the excess times of a specific number of 1000 × p (≧ 10) or more (per 1000 shots). Specifically, in 232FS005, first, it is checked whether or not the time exceeds 10,000, and then, it is checked whether or not the time exceeds 11,000. Check if it is time to exceed the number obtained.

  The effect control CPU 120 selects an effect of the acquired number setting suggestion effect when the acquired number of game balls is at the time of exceeding any of a specific number of 1000 × p (≧ 10) or more (Y in 232FS005). Random numbers are extracted, and 10,000 or more shots are obtained from any of the first to third acquired number setting suggestion effect determination tables of FIGS. 9-11 (A) to (C) according to the set values (set values 1 to 3) The effect type including the character image to be displayed when the corresponding acquired number is exceeded when the specified number is exceeded is determined (232FS006), and the process proceeds to 232FS009. On the other hand, production control CPU 120 shifts to 232FS007 when the acquired number of game balls is not at any time exceeding any of a specific number of 1000 × p (≧ 10) or more (232FS005: N).

  In 232FS007, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether any of the specific numbers (timing 11111, 2222,...) Of the number of obtained zolo eyes whose number of acquisitions is equal to or greater than 1111 × r (≧ 1) is the excess point. . Specifically, in 232FS007, it is first checked whether or not the time has exceeded 1111 rounds, and then it is checked whether or not the time has exceeded 22222 rounds. Check to see if any of the numbers have been exceeded.

  The effect control CPU 120 sets the high setting (set value 1, set value 1) when the acquired number is at the time of exceeding any of the specific numbers of the slots of 1111 × r (≧ 1) or more (232FS007). In the case of 2), a lottery for determining whether or not to display a special acquired number image composed of special character images other than the first to fifth character images shown in FIG. 9-11 is executed, and the lottery is won. Then, it is determined to display the special acquired number image (232FS008), and the process shifts to 232FS009. If the lottery is not won, the special acquired number image is not displayed. On the other hand, production control CPU 120 ends the process when the number of acquisitions is not at the time when the number of slots obtained exceeds 1111 × r (≧ 1) or more (N in 232FS007). Thus, the special acquired number image that can be displayed only when the setting value is the high setting is provided. Thus, when the special acquisition number image is displayed, it is determined that the setting value is the high setting.

  In 232FS009, effect control CPU 120 displays the character image determined in 232FS002, 232FS004, 232FS006, or 232FS008, and the acquired number image corresponding to the acquired number, and ends the process.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the acquired number setting suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 9-10 by executing the acquired number notification process of FIG. 9-12.

[Example of production when the execution period overlaps between the production that suggests the number of acquisitions and other productions]
Since the acquired number setting suggestion effect is executed when the number of acquired game balls reaches a specific number during the big hit game state, the effect is executed during a predetermined period after the start of the game state, for example, an interval between rounds. In the period, the fanfare effect period at the start of the big hit game state, and the ending effect period at the end of the big hit game state, setting suggestion effects (for example, setting suggestion effect in the interval period between rounds), and other The production and the execution period may partially or completely overlap. In such a case, the acquired number setting suggestion effect may be executed with priority.

  In addition, when the execution periods of the acquired number setting suggestive effect and the other effects partially or entirely overlap, both the acquired number setting suggestive effect and the other effect may be performed in parallel. . Further, the execution timing of any one of the overlapping effects may be shifted by a predetermined period so that the effects are not repeatedly performed. In addition, one of the effects may be executed with priority, and both effects may be executed. However, one of the effects is restricted (for example, one of the effect images is displayed in a reduced size, one of the sound outputs is output). , The execution of a part of the effect such as the light-emitting effect may be stopped).

[Example of a production effect when the execution period of the production effect suggesting the number of acquisitions and the production suggesting the over-winning prize overlap]
Since the acquisition number setting suggestion effect described above is executed when the number of acquired game balls reaches a specific number during the jackpot game state, the over-winning setting of the characteristic portion 231F is executed, for example, during an interval period between rounds. The suggestion effect and the execution period may partially or completely overlap. In such a case, both the acquisition number setting suggestion effect and the acquisition number setting suggestion effect may be executed in parallel.

  In addition, when the execution periods of the score setting suggestion effect and the over-prize setting suggestion effect overlap, one of the effects may be preferentially executed. Further, the execution timing of any one of the effects may be shifted by a predetermined period so that the effect is not performed repeatedly. In addition, one of the effects may be executed with priority, and both effects may be executed. However, one of the effects is restricted (for example, one of the effect images is displayed in a reduced size, one of the sound outputs is output). , The execution of a part of the effect such as the light-emitting effect may be stopped).

Next, main effects obtained by the characteristic portion 232F will be described.
[1] As shown in FIG. 9-11, each time the number of game balls acquired in the big hit game state reaches a specific number, a setting suggestion is set to which of the set values 1 to 3 is set. As the effect, the acquired number setting suggestion effect can be executed, so that the interest of the acquired number setting suggestion effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the set value can be improved.

  [2] As shown in FIGS. 9-10, the acquired number setting suggestion effect is displayed by displaying the acquired number image 232F001 and character images such as the first character image to the fifth character image 232F002 to 232F005. Is executed, and as shown in FIGS. 9-11 (A) to (C), the selection ratio of the character image display of a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects differs according to the setting values 1 to 3; The type of the specific image displayed in the setting suggestion effect can be noticed.

[3] As shown in 232FS007 and 232FS008 in FIG. 9-12, the images displayed in the setting suggestion effect include the number-of-obtained-double-eye images and the special character image. By paying attention to whether or not several images and special character images are displayed, the interest of the game is improved.

  [4] As shown in FIGS. 9-11 (A) to (C), the reliability indicating which setting value is suggested by the character image when the number of game balls obtained is large is smaller than when the number of game balls obtained is small. Since the degree is high, the joy of having obtained the game ball is improved, and the setting suggestion reliability of the image displayed in the setting suggestion effect is improved, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  As shown in [5] [Example of production when the execution period of the number-of-acquisition setting suggestion and the other productions overlap, it is possible to execute both the effect of setting the number of acquisitions and the suggestion of setting the interval period between rounds. In such a case, if the execution timings of these effects overlap, an effect of setting the number of acquisitions is performed, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in obtaining game balls.

  [6] As shown in [Example of a production when the execution period of the number-of-acquisition setting suggestion effect and the over-prize setting suggestion effect overlap], when both the acquisition number setting suggestion effect and the over-prize setting suggestion effect can be executed. When the execution timings of these effects are overlapped, both effects are executed, and both effects are executed reliably, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The control in FIG. 8 and the control in FIGS. 9-10 to 9-12 may be applied in combination with each other. That is, the control related to the setting of the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK and the control related to the effect of the characteristic portion 232F may be combined.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic portion 232F)
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristic portion 232F, there is a gaming machine whose setting value can be changed, which is described in JP-A-2010-200902. In addition, during a jackpot game in an advantageous state, a gaming machine capable of executing a notification effect when the number of game balls obtained as game media reaches a specific number is described in JP-A-2010-075436. There is something. However, in the technology described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2010-075436, there is room for improvement in the notification effect of a gaming machine provided with a set value. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 232F for providing a gaming machine capable of improving the entertainment of the notification effect in the gaming machine provided with the set value,
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Setting means (such as the game control microcomputer 100) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 3);
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 or the like) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage (big hit probability or the like) for the player is different based on the set values (the set value 1 to the set value 3). With
When the number of acquired game media (gaming balls) in the advantageous state (number of payouts) reaches a specific number (excess number per 1000 shots), a notification effect (acquisition number setting suggestion effect) can be executed,
The execution ratios of the plurality of notification effects provided in accordance with the set values are different (in FIG. 9-11, the selection ratios of the plurality of types of suggestion effects are different in accordance with the set values 1 to 3).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the notification effect in the gaming machine provided with the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 232F,
The notification effect includes an acquired number image (acquired number image 232F001 or the like) indicating the acquired number of game media and a specific image (the first character image to the fifth character image in FIG. 9-10).
The selection ratios of the plurality of specific images provided in accordance with the set values (set values 1 to 3) are made different (according to the set values 1 to 3 in FIGS. 9-11 (A) to (C)). The selection ratio of the display of character images of multiple types of setting suggestions is different, etc.),
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 232F may be a gaming machine.
According to such a configuration, the type of the specific image can be noticed.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 232F,
The notification effect includes a special acquisition number image (a zoro-eye acquisition number image and a special character image) that is executed only at a high setting value that is highly advantageous to the player (232FS007, FIG. 9-12). 232FS008),
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 232F characterized by the above may be used.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to whether or not the special acquisition number image is displayed, and the interest of the game is improved.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 according to the characteristic portion 232F,
The setting suggestion reliability indicating which setting value is suggested by the specific image is higher when the number of game media obtained is larger than when the number of game media is smaller (FIGS. 9-11 (A) to (C)).
The game machine of the means 2 or the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 232F characterized by the above may be used.
According to such a configuration, the joy of having acquired the game medium is improved, and the setting suggestion reliability of the specific image is improved, so that the interest of the game is improved.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 according to the characteristic portion 232F,
It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect of an interval period between rounds) for setting suggestion different from the notification effect during a predetermined period in the advantageous state,
When the execution timings of the notification effect and the setting suggestion effect overlap, the notification effect is executed with priority ([Example of effect when execution period overlap between acquisition number setting suggestion effect and other effects]) ),
It may be a gaming machine of the means 1 to means 4 according to the characteristic portion 232F characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, since the notification effect is given priority over the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in obtaining the game medium.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 according to the characteristic portion 232F,
Variable prize means (special variable prize) that can be changed between a first state (open state or the like) in which game media (game balls and the like) can be won and a second state (closed state or the like) in which game media cannot be won or cannot be won. Ball device 7 etc.)
Variable prize control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the variable prize means from the first state to the second state when a predetermined number (upper limit of the number of prize) of game media has won the variable prize means. And further comprising
In connection with the fact that more game media than the predetermined number have won the variable winning means (over winning), it is possible to execute a specific effect (over winning setting suggesting effect in FIG. 9-6),
The execution ratios of the specific effects provided in plurality according to the set values are different (the selection ratios of the plurality of types of suggestion effects are different in accordance with the set values 1 to 3 in FIG. 9-11),
In the case where the execution timing of the notification effect and the specific effect are overlapped, both effects are executed (eg, an example of an effect when the execution periods of the acquisition number setting suggestion effect and the over-prize setting suggestion effect overlap), and the like.
It may be a gaming machine of the means 1 to means 4 according to the characteristic portion 232F characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, even when the execution timing of the notification effect and the specific effect overlap, both effects are reliably executed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Description of the characteristic part 233F]
Next, the characteristic portion 232F of the present embodiment will be described. For a pachinko gaming machine, a V prize has occurred when a V prize has occurred due to the detection means detecting that a game ball has passed through a specific area (V area) provided in the variable prize ball device. In some cases, a V prize notification effect, which is an effect notifying the fact, is executed by the effect control CPU 120.

  Examples of pachinko gaming machines in which various game controls are executed when a V prize is generated include the following types of two-type mixers and V-variable machines.

[One and two type mixing machine]
First, the outline of the configuration of the one-type and two-type mixer will be described. A first-type gaming machine that can be controlled to a big hit gaming state based on a determination result of a lottery determination using a random number for a big hit determination (hereinafter, referred to as a big hit determination), and a lottery determination using a random number for a small hit determination ( A pachinko gaming machine that is controlled in the small hitting game state based on the determination result of the small hitting game and that can be combined with a second-type gaming machine that can be controlled to the big hitting game state when the V prize occurs, It is called a so-called one-two-type mixer.

  More specifically, in addition to the variable winning prize ball device having a big prize opening that is opened in the big hit advantageous state, such as the special variable prize ball device 7 as in the special variable prize ball device 7, the small hitting game state Is provided with a variable winning prize ball device which is opened at the time. A variable winning prize ball device for small hits is provided in the game area. The variable winning prize ball device for small hits is provided with a V region in which a game ball can enter.

  When a winning start to the first starting winning opening is detected, a jackpot determination is executed, and when the result of the jackpot determination is obtained, the variable display of the first special figure is executed and the jackpot display result (specific display result) ), The first-type big hit game control in which the big hit variable winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds and a big hit game state is executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

  When a start winning in the second starting winning opening is detected, a jackpot determination is executed. When a jackpot determination result (specific display result) is obtained, a change display of the second special map is executed and the jackpot display result is displayed. As a result, a game control similar to the big hit based on the start winning at the first starting winning port is performed, for example, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, when the small hit determination results in a non-big hit determination result, the small hit determination is performed, and when the small hit determination result is obtained, the fluctuation display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result is obtained. The small win game state is controlled by the player, and the variable winning prize ball device for the small hit is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When a game ball is received by the variable winning prize ball device for small hits in the small hitting game state, and the game ball enters and is detected in the V region, the variable winning prize ball device for big hits is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. The second-type jackpot game control for setting the jackpot game state to be released is executed by the CPU 103 of the microcomputer 100 for game control.

[V-variable machine]
Next, the outline of the configuration of the V-like transformer will be described. In the V-variable changing machine, a V-region in which a game ball can enter is provided in a variable winning prize ball device opened in the big hit game state like the special variable prize ball device 7. The variable winning prize device provided with the V region may be constituted by the special variable prize ball device 7 itself, or may be constituted by a variable prize ball device for a big hit provided separately from the special variable prize ball device 7.

In the V-variable changing machine, it is determined to be a big hit based on the determination result of the big hit determination, and if it is determined to be a type of the big variable big hit based on the determination result of the big hit type determination, the big hit game state is set. In the predetermined round, the variable winning prize ball device for the big hit is controlled to be opened in such a manner that the game ball can enter the V region in the predetermined round. If it is determined based on the result of the jackpot type determination that the type of the jackpot is not the variable jackpot, the variable winning prize ball device for the jackpot is controlled to be in an open state in such a manner that the game ball cannot enter the V region.

In the V-variable changing machine, in a predetermined round, when a game ball enters and is detected in the V-region, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 controls the gaming state after the big hitting game state ends.
[Example of V-prize setting suggestion effect]
The characteristic portion 233F is an effect of notifying that a V prize has occurred when a V prize has occurred in a pachinko gaming machine capable of generating a V prize, such as the above-described one-type two-mixer and V-variable machine. In addition to notifying that a V prize has occurred as a V prize notification effect, a V that can indicate to which of the set values 1 to 3 the set value such as the above-described jackpot winning probability is set. A description will be given of an example in which a winning setting suggestion effect is executed, and the execution ratio (selection ratio) of the effect provided with the effect type differs according to the set value 1 to 3 such as a jackpot winning probability for the V winning setting suggestion effect. .

  FIG. 9-13 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing an example of an effect of the V winning setting suggesting effect according to the characteristic portion 233F. In a pachinko gaming machine capable of generating a V prize, such as a single-type two-mixer or a V-variable machine, when a V prize occurs, a V prize occurrence designation command is issued as a production control command for designating that a V prize has occurred. When a V winning award generation designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 and received by the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes a V winning setting suggesting effect.

  FIG. 9-13 shows an effect mode of the V winning setting suggesting effect when a normal image is displayed on the image display device 5 when the setting value 3 which is a low setting is set in (A), (B) shows an effect mode of the V winning setting suggestion effect when the high setting suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 5 when the setting value 1 which is the high setting is set, and (D) shows the high setting. The effect form of the V winning setting suggestion effect when the high setting final image is displayed on the image display device 5 when the setting value 1 as the setting is set is shown.

  In the V prize setting suggestion effect, for example, as shown in (A) to (C), a V prize image 233F001 indicating “V prize” of “V” is displayed on the image display device 5 and a predetermined color is displayed therearound. In addition to the basic display of the V-image consisting of the aura image (jagged shape image), it is possible to indicate which of the set values 1 to 3 the set value such as the jackpot winning probability is set to. Character images selected from a plurality of types of character images, such as a first character image 233F002, a second character image 233F003, and a third character image 233F004, are displayed.

  The first character image 233F002 shown in (A) is a character image used when displaying a normal image that is selected and displayed at the highest ratio regardless of whether the setting is the low setting or the high setting. is there. The second character image 233F003 shown in (B) is a character image used when displaying a high setting suggestion image that is more frequently selected when the setting is high than when the setting is low. The third character image 233F004 shown in (C) is a character image used when displaying a high setting final image that is not selected for the low setting and is selected only when the setting is high.

  FIG. 9-14 is a diagram illustrating, in a table form, a V winning setting suggestion effect determination table used to select an effect type (an effect image including a character image) of the setting suggestion effect to be executed as the V winning setting suggestion effect. . The V prize setting suggestion effect determination table is stored in the ROM 121.

FIG. 9-14 (A) shows the number of consecutive games of the big hit (the number of times the big hit occurs continuously. For example, the big hit during the special change state and the special game state after the end of the big hit game state such as the time saving state). 9 is a first V prize setting suggestion effect determination table used when the number of times in which the event has occurred is 9 or less. FIG. 9-11 (B) is a second V prize setting suggestion effect determination table used when the number of consecutive games per jackpot is 10 or more. The first and second V prize setting suggestion effect determination tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  In the first and second V prize setting suggestion effect determination tables of FIGS. 9A and 9B, character images such as the first character image to the third character image displayed in the V prize setting suggestion effect determination table. When the correspondence between the type of the effect image including the type and the allocation of the random number for the V winning setting suggestive effect selection (displayed in%) is set to the set value 1 and set to the set value 2 , And when the setting value is set to 3. The random number for V winning setting suggestion effect selection is a random number for effect selection updated by the effect control CPU 120.

  As shown in the tables of FIGS. 9-14 (A) and (B), the type of the effect image including the type of the character image displayed in the V winning setting suggestive effect is “normal image including the display of the first character image”. Setting suggestion effect of performing “display of a second character image”, setting suggestion effect of performing “display of a high setting suggestion image including display of a second character image”, and “display of a high setting final image including display of a third character image” Includes setting suggestion effects.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-14 (A) and (B), the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the normal image including the display of the first character image” in the V winning setting suggestion effect is selected by the set value. 1, setting value 2 and setting value 3 are respectively 88% or more, and the setting suggestion effect of “displaying a normal image including the display of the first character image” is selected at an extremely high ratio. . Then, the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the normal image including the display of the first character image” is selected has a relationship of “setting value 1 <setting value 2 <setting value 3”. Thus, when the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the normal image including the display of the first character image” is executed, the ratio of the setting value 3 is the highest.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the high setting suggestion image including the display of the second character image” is “set value 3 <set value 2”. There is a relationship of “set value 1”. Thus, when the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the high setting suggestion image including the display of the second character image” is performed, the ratio of the setting value 1 is the highest.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-14 (A) and (B), the selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect for “display of the high setting final image including the display of the third character image” is “setting value 2, 3 <setting value”. There is a relationship of “value 1”, and is 0% for the set values 2 and 3. Thus, when the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the high setting final image including the display of the third character image” is made, the setting value is determined to be 1.

  According to FIGS. 9-14 (A) and (B), the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the high setting suggestion image including the display of the second character image” and the “high setting including the display of the third character image” In the setting suggestion effect of “displaying a suggestion image”, the ratio of setting value 1 or setting value 2 which is high setting is higher than setting value 3 which is low setting. Thereby, when a setting suggestion effect of performing “display of a high setting suggestion image including display of the second character image” and a setting suggestion effect of performing “display of a high setting suggestion image including display of the third character image” are performed. Is more likely to be a high setting than a low setting.

In addition, the second V winning setting suggestion effect determination table (B) used when the number of consecutive games is 10 or more is the first V winning setting suggestion effect (A) used when the number of consecutive games is 9 or less. Compared with the determination table, at the time of the high setting such as the setting value 1 and the setting value 2, the setting suggestion effect of “displaying the high setting suggestion image including the display of the second character image” and “the setting of the third character image When the setting suggestion effect of performing “display of high setting suggestion image including display” is selected at a high rate and a low setting such as setting value 3, “display of normal image including display of first character image” is displayed. The rate at which the setting suggestion effect is selected is low. As a result, as the number of consecutive villas increases, the reliability of the suggestion effect of the set value by the V winning setting suggestion effect increases.

  When an image to be displayed in the V winning setting suggesting effect is selected using the first and second V winning setting suggesting effect determination tables in FIGS. 9A and 9B, basically, the “first character image of the first character image is displayed. The setting suggestion effect of “displaying a normal image including display” is executed at a high frequency, and the “suggestion effect of the second character image of the second character image” is performed less frequently than the setting suggestion effect of “displaying a normal image including the display of the first character image”. One of a setting suggestion effect of performing "display of high setting suggestion image including display" and a setting suggestion effect of performing "display of high setting suggestion image including display of third character image" is executed. Then, depending on the type of the character image displayed in the V winning setting suggestive effect, the degree of expectation as to whether or not the setting is high is different, and the degree of expectation as to which of the set values 1 to 3 is different. With the V winning setting suggestion effect determination table setting suggestion effect as described above, the degree of expectation of the player for the set value such as a big hit can be improved. Furthermore, depending on the type of the character image, it may be determined that the setting value 1 is the most advantageous setting value for the player. Therefore, the V winning setting suggestion effect as shown in FIG. Can be further improved.

  FIG. 9-15 is a flowchart showing the V winning notification process. The V winning award notification process is a process performed as a part of the process during the big hit effect process (S176) in FIG.

  First, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is time to receive a V winning occurrence designation command which is an effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when a V winning occurrence has occurred. It is determined whether or not a V winning has occurred (233FS001). The effect control CPU 120 shifts to 233FS002 when the V winning occurrence designation command is received (Y in 233FS001). On the other hand, if the effect control CPU 120 has not received the V winning occurrence designation command (N in 233FS001), the process ends.

  In 233FS002, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the count value of the number-of-en-games counter, which is a counter for counting the number of extended games, is 10 or more. The number-of-enhancements counter is a counting means that counts the number of renions by adding and updating the count value each time a big hit that satisfies the above-described rensou conditions occurs in a process different from the V winning award notification process. is there.

  If the count value of the number-of-rends counter is not 10 or more (N in 233FS002), the effect control CPU 120 extracts an effect image selection random number for a V winning setting suggesting effect, and extracts the random number shown in FIG. The effect image including the display of the character image at the time of the V winning according to the current setting value (setting values 1 to 3) is determined from the first V winning setting suggestive effect determining table (233FS003), and the process proceeds to 233FS004. On the other hand, when the number-of-contests counter is 10 or more (Y in 233FS002), the effect control CPU 120 extracts the effect image selection random number of the V winning setting suggestion effect, and extracts the random number in FIG. 9-14 (B). The effect image including the display of the character image at the time of the V winning according to the setting is determined by the second V winning setting suggesting effect determining table (233FS005), and the process proceeds to 233FS004.

  In 233FS004, effect control CPU 120 displays the character image and the V winning image corresponding to the effect image determined in 233FS003 or 233FS004, and ends the process.

  In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V winning setting suggesting effect as shown in FIG. 9-13 by executing the V winning notification process of FIG. 9-15.

[Example of a production effect when the execution period of the V-prize setting suggestion effect and the acquisition number setting suggestion effect overlap)
When the execution period of the V winning setting suggestion effect and the acquisition number setting suggestion effect of the characteristic portion 233F partially or entirely overlap, the V winning setting suggestion effect may be preferentially executed.

  In addition, when the execution period of the V winning setting suggestion effect and the acquisition number setting suggestion effect overlap, both effects may be executed in parallel. Further, one of the effects may be executed with priority. Further, the execution timing of any one of the effects may be shifted by a predetermined period so that the effect is not performed repeatedly. In addition, one of the effects may be executed with priority, and both effects may be executed. However, one of the effects is restricted (for example, one of the effect images is displayed in a reduced size, one of the sound outputs is output). , The execution of a part of the effect such as the light-emitting effect may be stopped).

  In addition, as an example of performing the V winning setting suggestion effect using a character image, an effect using a plurality of different types of character images has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to provide an effect suggesting a set value by operating in different types of motion modes and making the selection ratios of a plurality of types of motion modes different for one character image according to the set values.

  In addition, as an example of performing the V winning setting suggesting effect, the V winning image 33F001 is displayed in a plurality of types of operation patterns (a plurality of types of rotation directions (up, down, left and right), a plurality of types of rocking operations (up, down, left, right), etc.). An effect of operating the V winning image 33F001 in an operation pattern selected from a plurality of types may be made possible. In this case, an effect indicating the set value may be made by changing the selection ratio of a plurality of types of V winning images according to the set value.

  Further, as an example of executing the V winning setting suggesting effect, an effect using one type of V winning image 33F001 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of different display modes (a plurality of colors and a plurality of shapes) are used. , A plurality of sizes, etc.) may be used. In such a case, an effect indicating the setting value may be made by changing the selection ratio of the V winning images of a plurality of types of display modes according to the setting value. An effect that suggests a set value by making the selection ratio of the V winning images of a plurality of types of display modes different according to such setting values, and a selection of a plurality of V winning images according to the above setting values. It is also possible to execute a V prize setting suggestion effect that combines an effect with a different ratio.

  Further, as an example of executing the V winning setting suggesting effect, the V winning setting suggesting effect using the V winning image 33F001 as described above is executed without executing the V winning setting suggesting effect by the character image. Is also good.

Next, main effects obtained by the characteristic portion 233F will be described.
[1] As shown in FIG. 9-13, for a pachinko gaming machine of a type 1 and 2 type mixer that can be controlled to a big hit gaming state based on detection of a V winning, according to setting values 1 to 3 Since the selection ratios of a plurality of types of V winning setting suggesting effects using character images and the like are different, it is possible to improve the interest in the V winning setting suggesting effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the set values.

[2] As shown in FIG. 9-13, for a pachinko gaming machine of a V-variable machine that can be controlled to a probable state based on detection of a V-prize, a character image is set according to set values 1 to 3. Since the selection ratios of a plurality of types of V winning setting suggesting effects using the same are different, it is possible to improve the interest in the V winning setting suggesting effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the set values.

  [3] As shown in FIG. 9-14, the selection ratio of the character image of the plurality of types of V winning setting suggestive effects differs depending on the set value 1 to the set value 3, so that the player pays attention to the type of the character image. It can make the game more interesting.

  [4] As shown in FIGS. 9-14 (A) and (B), the selection ratios of the plurality of types of V winning setting suggestive effects differ according to the number of extended games, so that the big hit gaming state is continuously controlled. The player can pay attention to the pattern of the V prize setting suggestive effect when the player is present, and the interest of the game is improved.

  [5] As shown in FIGS. 9-14 (A) and (B), the setting suggestive reliability indicating which setting value is suggested by the character image of the prize setting suggestive effect increases as the number of consecutive games increases. high. Thereby, the interest of the game is improved by associating the number of big hits and the character image of the winning setting suggestion effect.

  [6] As shown in [Example of a production in which the execution period of the V-prize setting suggestion effect and the acquisition number setting suggestion effect overlap), the execution period of the V-prize setting suggestion effect and the acquisition number setting suggestion effect of the characteristic part 233F is different. In the case where some or all of them overlap, by giving priority to the V winning setting suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of security when passing through the V region.

  The control in FIG. 8 and the control in FIGS. 9-13 to 9-15 may be applied in combination with each other. That is, the control regarding the setting of the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK and the control regarding the effect of the characteristic portion 233F may be combined.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic portion 233F)
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristic portion 232F, there is a gaming machine whose setting value can be changed, which is described in JP-A-2010-200902. JP-A-2006-202605 describes a gaming machine capable of executing a pass notification effect when a game ball as a game medium passes through a specific area. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-202605, there is room for improvement in the passing notification effect of a gaming machine provided with a set value. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 233F for providing a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the passing notification effect in the gaming machine provided with the set value,
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Setting means (such as the game control microcomputer 100) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 3);
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 or the like) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage (big hit probability or the like) for the player is different based on the set values (the set value 1 to the set value 3). With
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed the specific area (V area), it is possible to control the advantageous state (big hit game state or the like),
When the game medium passes through the specific area, a passing notification effect (V winning setting suggestion effect) is executed, and the execution ratio of the plurality of types of the passing information effect provided according to the set value differs (see FIG. 9-14). Depending on the set value 1 to the set value 3, the selection ratio of the plurality of types of setting suggestive effects is different, etc.),
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the passing notification effect in the gaming machine provided with the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 233F,
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (such as a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Setting means (such as the game control microcomputer 100) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 3);
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 or the like) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage (big hit probability or the like) for the player is different based on the set values (the set value 1 to the set value 3). With
It is possible to control to a special state (probable state or the like) different from the advantageous state based on the game medium passing through the specific area (V area),
When the game medium passes through the specific area, a passing notification effect (V winning setting suggestion effect) is executed, and the execution ratio of the plurality of types of the passing information effect provided according to the set value differs (see FIG. 9-14). Depending on the set value 1 to the set value 3, the selection ratio of the plurality of types of setting suggestive effects is different, etc.),
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the passing notification effect in the gaming machine provided with the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 233F,
In the passing notification effect, predetermined images (the V winning image 33F001 and the first character image 233F002 to the third character image 233F003) are displayed, and the selection rates of the plurality of types of the predetermined images differ according to the set value (FIG. In 9-14, the selection ratio of a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects differs according to the setting value 1 to the setting value 3),
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 233F characterized by the above may be used.
According to such a configuration, the type of the predetermined image can be noticed, and the interest of the game is improved.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 according to the characteristic portion 233F,
The execution ratio of the passing notification effect is different depending on the number of times of continuous control in the advantageous state (number of consecutive rooms) (in FIGS. 9-14 (A) and (B), a plurality of types are determined according to the number of consecutive rooms). The selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different, etc.),
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 to means 3 according to the characteristic portion 233F characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the type of the passing notification effect when the control is continuously performed in the advantageous state, and the interest of the game is improved.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 according to the characteristic portion 233F,
The setting suggestion reliability indicating which setting value is suggested by the predetermined image is higher as the number of times of continuous control in the advantageous state (number of consecutive rooms) is higher (FIG. 9-14 (A), (B)),
The gaming machine of the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 233F may be a gaming machine.
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved by associating the continuous number of advantageous states with the predetermined image.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 according to the characteristic portion 233F,
When the number of acquired game media (gaming balls) in the advantageous state (number of payouts) reaches a specific number (excess number per 1000 shots), a notification effect (acquisition number setting suggestion effect) can be executed,
When the passing notification effect and the notification effect are executed at the same timing, the passing notification effect is executed with priority ([During the overlapping period of the V winning setting suggesting effect and the acquisition number setting suggesting effect, the effect is performed at the same time). Example)),
The gaming machine of the means 1 to means 5 according to the characteristic portion 233F may be a feature.
According to such a configuration, since the passing notification effect is given priority over the notification effect, it is possible to give a sense of security when passing through the specific area.

    [Example of setting suggestion effect according to the timing of big hit occurrence during probable change state]

  After the end of the jackpot gaming state, in a pachinko game machine in which the game control for controlling to the probable change state is performed for a predetermined period (period in which the predetermined number of times of fluctuation display is executed), For example, whether a big hit has occurred at the timing of the first half period, the second half period, the period up to a specific number of fluctuations (for example, 20 times), and the specific period of a period divided into a plurality of periods of three or more periods). Accordingly, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect as described above may be changed, and the reliability (expectation) which is a high setting when the setting suggestion effect is executed may be changed.

  For example, when a jackpot occurs in a relatively early period during the probability change state period, the player feels that the player has lost due to the jackpot despite the fact that the probability change state period still remains for many periods. As a bonus in which a big hit occurs in a relatively early period, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect as described above may be higher than when a big hit occurs in a relatively late period, and the setting suggestion effect is executed. In this case, the reliability (expectation), which is a high setting, may be increased. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel as if he or she has lost.

  Conversely, for example, when a big hit occurs during a relatively late period in the probable change state period, the player feels relieved because the big hit has occurred in a state where the probable change state period is not much left. As a bonus in which a big hit occurs in a later period, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect as described above may be higher than when a big hit occurs in a relatively early period, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed. The reliability (expectation), which is a high setting, may be increased. In this way, the player can feel the additional sense of benefit in addition to the sense of security, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

    [Example of light emission pattern of setting change notification and setting confirmation notification lamp]

  In the setting change notification for notifying that the set value has been changed, in addition to displaying the setting change notification screen and outputting the setting change notification sound, or in place of part or all, light emission is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100. Control may be performed such that part or all of the light-emitting body such as a lamp (LED) emits light in a specific light-emitting pattern. For example, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are configured by luminous bodies whose light emission is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, as the setting change notification, for example, the luminous body provided on the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is displayed during normal game (during fluctuation, waiting (when not fluctuating), big hit, etc.). ) May be controlled to emit light in a different manner (for example, a blinking display or a combination pattern that is not normally lit).

  In addition, in the setting confirmation notification for notifying that the set value can be confirmed, in addition to the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification sound, or in place of part or all, the game control microcomputer 100 Control may be performed such that part or all of the light-emitting body such as a lamp (LED) whose light emission is controlled emits light in a specific light-emitting pattern. For example, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are configured by luminous bodies whose light emission is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, as the setting confirmation notification, for example, the luminous body provided on the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is displayed during normal game (during fluctuation, waiting (when not fluctuating), big hit, etc.). ) May be controlled to emit light in a different manner (for example, a blinking display or a combination pattern that is not normally lit).

  As described above, the illuminant controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 controls the execution of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification by the illuminant controlled by the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to specify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked.

  Note that a lamp that emits light only when the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed may be provided in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. In such a configuration, even if the pachinko gaming machine does not have an image display device, the setting is being changed by the dedicated lamp provided on the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. Alternatively, it is easy to specify that the confirmation is being performed. In addition, the illuminant whose emission is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to the illuminant provided in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol indicator 4B, but may be other illuminants such as lamps. May be used. When controlling to execute the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification using the illuminants provided in the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, the special symbol change display and the special symbol change display are performed. The setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification may be executed by using different light emitters while the symbol is stopped.

  In addition, by performing control to execute setting change notification or setting confirmation notification by the illuminant controlled by the effect control CPU 120, the setting change or confirmation is performed by the illuminant controlled by the effect control CPU 120. It may be possible to specify that there is something.

  It should be understood that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all aspects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  1 pachinko gaming machine, 7 special variable winning ball device, 711 main board, 12 effect control board, 100 game control microcomputer, 120 effect control CPU.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
The advantageous state is a state configured by repeating a plurality of predetermined games,
The advantageous state includes at least a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is less favorable than the first advantageous state,
In the first advantageous state, at the start of the predetermined game, it is possible to execute a special effect which is not executed in the second advantageous state.

Images